UC-NRLF B 3 TE2 T3M ? A. A COREAN MANUAL OK PHRASE BOOK: WITH IXTRODUCTORY GEAMMAR BY JAMES 8C0TT, M.A., H. B. M,'h Vice Consul. 8ECOXD EDITION* Seoul : EnctLish CHtEcn Mission Peess. 1893, L6 n b-^t 73. 07 fao3 PREFACE, In issuing a Second Edition of my Manual, I would venture to solicit for my labours the kindly consideration of critics and scholars. The Corean language presents so many difficulties both of grammatical construction and of verb inflection that the task of the student who attempts to acquire a mastery of its colloquial is well nigh hopeless. There are no native grammars of the language; and the only vocabulary used by Corean scholars is the Oh P'yen 3S^' a Chinese Dictionary which gives the Corean transliteration of the sounds of the Chinese Characters with their meanings in Chinese.- Although one of the most ancient tongues of Asia, the influence of Chinese literature and civiliza- tion early led Corean scholars to relegate the study of their vernacular to a subordinate place in public estimation. The native aspirant for official position and literary honours devotes himself entirely to the study' of the Chinese classics ; and all official and other correspondence is conducted in Chinese t<2>- the exclusion of the Corean script. To the Fathers of the French Mission in Corea belongs the distinction of having compiled the first Dictionary and Grammar of the language — monu- ments of painstaking accuracy and erudition. As an introduction to the study of the colloquial, I ventured in 1887 to publish a Corean Manual — a collection of sentences prefaced by a few grammatical notes intended to help the novice over the first difficulties of the language and to indicate those essentials of noun inflection and verb conjugation which require especial study and consideration. These sentences met with so favourable a reception that, in deference of the expressed wishes of Corean students and others, I have retained them in niucli; their original form, making only such alterations as a fuj'tlier acquaintance with the spoken language has shown to be necessary said useful. The nev/ matter- added to the present edition is explanatory of the grammar and especially o: V-v> #,i i ^f>,'^n I verb conjugation, and will, it is hoped smooth the course of future students, and perhaps prepare the way to a more complete and graduated text book. In the present volume I have striven to embody the results of my own tentative efforts in the study of the language ; it is in short, the fruits of my own experience and a slender contribution to the small total of our knowledge of Corean speech. In conclusion, it is my pleasant duty to record my acknowledgments to the Rev. M. N. Trollope of the English Church Mission in Gorea for much and valuable assistance in revising the proofs and for many important emenda- tions and suggestions as the volume passed through the Press. To Bishop Corfe I am also bound to convey my sincere thanks for the special printing facilities, that he generously placed at my disposal in publishing the present Edition. May, 1893, THE COREAIS^ ALPHABET. VOWELS. coNsoAA:;Tri. i)iriiTiio:v'cs. C\ 11 7 k ^1 ai, a;- ill aixvid. '> }'a W 11 ^1 1 i'(i, tli ill 6'{n'c?. H c (o, or u) x::. t 61) ci, ^ ill m:t. ^ ye (yO, or ya) :pl r (initial) ^ 1 (final) i yei, //c in v/c^ J. o tl lU ^ eui, ui of ^2/1 in French. A yo ^ P 4 oa, wa in wagon. ^ ou, (a) » 8 (initial) ^^ t (final) «] oai, it'OT/ in au;at/. -^ you, (yu) JL mute, (initial) ng, (final) 5^ oi, oi in 5ot?, o of Grerman. ^ eu -^ ch ^ cue, wo in ?/;o«. *l i ->*' ch' (aspirated c^) ^1 ouei, wc in ii"67/. $ a (sliort) -^ k' (aspirated k) ^ t* (aspirated t) ^1 oui, we of pronoun we, German il youi, ii prolocged. -^ p* (aspirated^) "^ h, (spiritub ubpei) INDEX. Introduction — History and origin of the Corean alphabet ALPHABET Consonants Aspirated checks Reduplicated checks and sibilant Trills Euphonic changes . . Table of consonant sounds . . Vowels Pronunciation and transliteration Table of vowel sounds Diphthongs Pronunciation and transliteration NOUNS .. Paradigm of case suffixes Form and use of case suffixes Number, gender, &c. Table of declensions . . (1) Root ending in k, m, ng, n and (3) „ (4) „ „ Exercises i-iv PRONOUNS Personal Demonstrative Possessive Interrogative . . Reflexive Indefinite .. Relative Exercises v-viii Pronominal substitutes NUMERALS Cardinal t (sometimes p) vowel P l-XXl PAaB. 1 2 3 3 4 4 6 11 11 13 15 15 18 18 19 21 22 22 23 24 25 29 29 31 31 32 33 34 35 36 40 42 42 ^ INDEX. Paok. 43 Ordinal Abbreviated form of nnmerals Fractions and multiples . . Numeratives . . . . . . • • • • • • • • * ' * * Exercises ix-xiii . . Divisions of time, seasons, &c 54 ' .. .. 56 45 45 47 Days — ^to-day, to-morrow, &c Exercises xiv-xv .. ADJECTIVES .. "..' ^^ Conjugation of adjectives . . . . . . • • • • • ♦ • • "^ Exercises xvi-xviii . . . . . . • • . • • • • • "'* Comparison of adjectives . . . . . . • • • • • • • • "' Exercises xix-xxi .. .. .. ,. . .► .» •• o8 VERB .. .. .. 71 Ordinary conjugation .. .. .. •• 73 Polite „ . . . . . . . . • • • • • • ^^ Interrogative „ . . . . . . . - . . . . • ♦ 91 Conjunction „ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 I. Conditional suffixes myen^ keteun . . . . . , . . . . 94 Exercise xxii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 II. Casual suffixes ni^ nikJca, nikkanteuro, tent . . . . , . 97 Exercise xxiii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 III. Adversative suffix wanan .. .. .. .. .. .. 100 Exercise xxiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 IV. Concessixe su^xes na^ tai, to, kenioa, chirato .. .. .. 103 Exercise XXV .. .. .. .. .... .. 106 V. Deliberative and alternative (a) na, kena .. .. .. .. .. '. ." .. ,, 107 Exercise xxvi ,, .. .. .. .. .. .. 109 (6) nanka, nanchi, tenchi, chi, nenchi .. .. .. ., ,110 Exercise xxvii-xxix .. .. .. .. .. .. 113 VI. Restrictive conditional suffix ya ., ., .. .. ., 116 Exercise XXX, .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 117 VII. Temporal suffixes to^a, wyewsye .. .. .. .. .. 118 Exercises xxxi-xxxii .. .. .. .. .. .. 120 VIII. Suffix ka with verbs " to fear," &c 122 Exercise xxxiii .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 122 Future Perfect Tense .. .. .. .. 122 Exercise xxxiv .. .. .. .. .. ., .. .. 123 Gerundive (1) ra, re, lla, He .. .. ,. .. 124 INDEX. m -r, . . Pass. Exercises xxxv-xxxvi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 (2) rya.rye .. .. .. '.. .. .. 127 Exercise xxxvii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Auxiliary verbs . . (1) Ota, kata, {2) pota .. .. .. ,. .. .. .. 128 {2,) ckouta, {'i) hata 129 Exercise xxxviii .. .. .. .. ,, ., .. .. 130 Negation. (1) an, ani, {2) mot . , .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 131 (3) (a) chianta, (b) chi mot h&ta, chi ani Mta (c) chi malho, etc, . . 131 Exercise xxxix . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 132 Demonstrative verb ilta "to be" .. .. .. ,. ., .. 133 Exercises xl-xli .. .. .. ., .. ., .. .. 134 Vbbbal nouns. (1) in »i and /^« .. ., ., ,. .. .. .. ,. 136 (2) in choul, choullo .. * ,. .. .. .. .. .. 137 Exercises xlii-xliii .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 137 (3) in chil and noriXt . . . . . . , . . . . , . . 139 Exercise xliv .. .. .. .. .. ., ,, .. 139 Adverbs derived from verbs and adjectives in kei and i or hi . , . . 140 Exercises xlv-xlvi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Causative AND PASSIVE verbs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 142 Exercise xlvii . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . 142 Idiomatic uses of the verb . . . . . , . . . . » , . . 143 (1) tdiro, manle eum .. .. .. ., .. .. .. .. 143 (2) Present and future relative participles . . . . , . . . 143 (3) kochyah&ta, kosipouta . . . . . . . , . . . . . . 144 (4) mcheuhhdta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 (5) chi as {a) an infinitive, {h) an interrogative . . . . . . . . 145 (6) ^niwre in {a) rita ov orita, {b) ma, .. .. .. ... .. 145 (7) Imperfect or pluperfect in tera ;. .. .. .. .. 145 (8) Relative participle in teran . . . . . , . . . . . . 145 Exercises xlviii-xlix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ADVERBS (1) Time .. 148 (2) Place 150 (3) Manner 151 (4) Degree • .. 152 (5) Negation and affirmation .. ,, ., .. .. ,, 153 POSTPOSITIONS .. 153 CONJUNCTIONS .*.' 154 jy INDEX. Pas«. 155 156 157 Exercise 1 Il^DIRECT ^VEECB. {oratio obliqua) •• Exercise li-liii . . . • • • • • • • • • ' * DOUBLE IMPERATIVE " to tell " or " to order," &c. !<><> Exercise liv .. .. •• ^^'^ EXERCISES. 1-13. General conversation .. .. .... .. .. 162 14. Trees, flowers, weeds, &c. .. .. •• 1^8 15. General conversation .... .. .. •• •• •• l^^ 16. Domestic animals .. .. •• •• •• •• •• 1^2 17. Well, wall, coolies, digging .. .'. .. 194 18. Travelling — horse, chair, &c. .. .• .. 196 19. Road, baggage, &c. .. •• 198 20. Wind, mist, clouds, &c . . . • 200 21. The different parts of the body, &c., blind, lame, &c. . . . . 202 22. Inn, room, dinner, sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 23. Points of the compass, N. S. E. W 206 24. Hunting 208 25. Money, silver, trading .. .. .. .. 210 26. Shopping, silk, piece goods, gauze, sables, skins, &c. . . . . 212 c,„ /Tastes — sweet, sour, &c. \ „,. '^^- IColours— Red, white, &c./ •• •* '^^^ 28. Rice, peas, beans, barley, &c. .. .. .. .. .. .. 216 29. Agriculture, rainbow, thunder, hail .. .. .. .. .. 218 30. Ice, water, soap ; Royal procession . . . . . . . . . . 220 31. Saddle, pony, bull 222 32. Linen, cotton, grasscloth, spectacles . , . . . . . . . . 224 33. Building operations, brickman, lime, roof, &c. . . . . . . 226 34. Chimney, blacksmith, paper-hanger, &c. . . . . . . . . 228 35. Fever, small-pox, ague, &c. . . .... . . . . . . 230 36. Doctor, medicine . . . . . . . . . ." . . . . 232 37. Prisoners, robbers, &c. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 234 38. Warfare, soldiers, rebels . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 39. General conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 40. Household utensils .. .. .. .. .. 240 INTEODIJCTION. The Corean alphabet as originally invented in 1447 A.D. contained twenty- eight distinct letters, classified and explained by native scholars as (1) initials, (2) finals and (3) medials. I. Eight letters used either as initials or aS finals : — 7 termed =g i 11 ki-yek for k W »» ^ i§ V 61. ni-eun „ n ^ »» m [*] t> ^ ti-kkeut „ t E ♦» m ZL ^ 6. / li-eiil \ ri-eur „ 1 r tj »i m # p 6. mi-eum „ m ^ »» * g. ^ pi-eup „ P ^ ») i« mi X ^ Bi-ot „ B 6 m m 6 I-^ ngi-eung „ ng The two characters [7ft] and [^] are to be read not as Chinese ideographs but with the sounds of their equivalent meaning in Corean, viz : lihut and ot. The reason is that the Coreans possessed no word in Chinese ending in t final wherewith to indicate this sound for the value of the consonant as a final. For t final, Coreans now use only the letter A ; but in ancient books and even to the end of the last century n also appears as a final in certain words. The t in ot of 8i-ot passes into s when inflected for case ; hence its use as representative of 8 final. II. Nine letters were used as initials only : — ^ as read in [*] ?1 for k' (a spirated k) 5 )i J& A „ t' ( t) 5Z. •)■> & ^ » P'( P) > >> It A „ ch •<* »> M A » ch' ( ch) COREAN MANUAL. O as read in m m ^1 •1 for j (soft or modulated) „ spiritus lenis. „ n (faint nasal) „ h (spiritus asper) The character [^] is to be read not as a Chinese ideograph but with the sound of its equivalent meaning in Corean, viz : k'i. In modern Chinese ^ has replaced the ancient sound and meaning of ^, which, in this connection, must be read ''yenff, where the initial n is intended to reproduce the sound of the Sanscrit palatal n as used in the gt f^ IE bI phonetics. III. Eleven letters used as medials or vowels : — • ^ 1 as m m m ^ * 4& -I- a ya e (o or u) ye (yo or yti) yo ou (u) you (yu) eu in eu?i^ i a in sd. But as at present employed the Corean alphabet contains these eleven vowels and only fourteen consonants. From among the initials three letters early disappeared from their script and were replaced by the letter ^ which, as an initial, had in its turn lost the nasal np sound, and now represents a purely open vowel initial corresponding to the spij'itus lenis. The history of the invention of the alphabet and especially of the euphonic changes which the language has undergone, both in speaking and in writing, is highly interesting philologically. A careful study of the early pronunciation of the Chinese ideographs will show clearly how these four letters O A 15 Ci came to be included under one phonetic INTRODUCTIONS^ as the initial. The letter q was employed to indicate a pure open vowel initial with the force and usage corresponding to the spiritus lenis, and as such appears regularly in old books and especially in manuscript works. No modification has ever occurred as regards the sound it was invented to represent ; but in modern Corean writing it has ceased to appear as a distinct circle somewhat like our English iigure aero (0), and has now assumed a shape analogous to the nasal n^ ending, viz : O- The triangular letter A was originally selected to indicate an initial consonant J as heard in the Chinese words H A t M? &c. This initial ; sound, however, is totally unknown to Coreans and only appears in this instance as an attempt to reproduce the Chinese pronunciation of the fifteenth century A. D. at the time of the invention of their alphabet. Anciently these words jwssessed a distinct fi instead of j as their initial consonant and were transliterated into Corean accordingly, though this n has now disappeared from modern Corean in common with the euphonic change still visible in Corean enunciation, whereby the initial n sound is made to disappear before the vowel i and its allied semi-vowel y. The modern pronunciation in Cantonese and Japanese of Chinese words now read with _;, fidly establishes this n sound as the correct value of the ancient initial in the third century A. D. when Chinese symbols were first introduced into Japan from Corea. In Japan, however, in addition to this Go-on H ^, as it is called, there is a concurrent j pronunciation known as Kan-on J|| ^, drawn from China direct towards the close of the sixth century. A comparative table of a few of the more common words occurring in Buddhist liturgies is here appended, giving their Corean transliteration as originally used in the fifteenth century, as also their pronunciation in Japanese and in the Shanghai dialect. The former shows the presence of ^' as the initial, but the latter sounds prove the true value of the original n as the initial ; while as regards modern Corean this n has been dropped in accordance with the laws regulating Corean euphony. Chinese. Bmiahist Japanese Corean. Sounds. ^1 ni (chi) ^1 il nin ^ nin ^i nin ^1 ni "1 niaku % nyo Shanghai. Corean. g ^1 ni (chi) nyih ^ tL nin niiin 1= :g| Ti nin ning rfO ^1 ni 6rh m niun in im zah yak niang vang IV COREAN MANUAL. a ^1* niakii ^1 nei zah m yak a or vei While the use of the Corean letter A was regularly employed in Buddhist books to transliterate the sound of J, the words themselves in ordinary colloquial were invariably pronounced with a true open vowel and accordingly written with the sphittis lejus O ^^ their initial — the triangular form disappearing as a distinct letter from the current script of the people. The letters "S and (J) were selected to represent two nasal sounds — n and n(/ resi^ectively of ancient Chinese — and still heard in Cantonese, in Shanghai and in other dialects of China. As faint nasal initials they have early disappeared from Corean ; an open vowel initial sound took their place and the words are now always written with the spiritua lenis Q. But in Buddhist books giving the Corean transliteration of the Sanscrit, the value of this n is indicated by the letter 1$. The following are a few of the more common Chinese characters appearing in Buddhist Rituals representative of this n as an initial : — "ai 5g «ak la N* ^ o^ 6^ ^] 'am "vei As regards the nasal initial 7}g, modern Corean has dropped the sound entirely, leaving only the open initial vowel written with the spiritus lenis. But the Corean transliteration of Sanscrit sounds, as also the pronunciation of modern Japanese and Cantonese, all agree in retaining the regular nasal ng as the initial sound but represented in Japanese by g. hinese. Buddhist Corean, IS o\ ^ (in which the upper stroke is merely an appending hook) became so assimilated as to result in the modern , which as an initial is now always mute, and used iis a " proconsonant " corresponding to the true spiritus lenis-, while as a final it continues to retain its original pronunciation tifj — a strong distinct nasal. The question of these phonetic changes and the modifications accxn-dingly of their alphabet by the Coreans are two points intimately associated with the :ancient pronunciation of the Chinese ideographs as originally intrmluced into the country in the eleventh century B. C. and especially at the time of the Buddhist propagandism in 372 A. D. The chief feature requiring special attention in this res])ect is the identity between the Corean and C^antonese jiroiinnciation of Chinese, with one exception — but an exception that only accentuates the rule — of the t final in Cantonese being invariably replacetl by I final in Corean. In their transliteration of Chinese, Coreans give six letters as finals, viz : k, L m, n, p and ng. But in the transliteration of their own vernacular Coreans possess and constantly use not only these six but a final t as well, making seven finals in all for their own language. It is therefore evident that in rendering the sounds of Chinese words, Coreans were not debarred by any special defect in their vocal organs from pronouncing a final t. Thus the natural inference is that the sounds of Chinese ideographs as originally taught to Coreans, contained no t as a final but were regularly pronounced with / as the final, and this latter sound has been passetl on accordingly from generation to generation. On the other hand, the Chinese are incapable of sounding Z final: they are equal only to the utterance of that letter when initial ; and no dialect jmssesses a regular I final in its pronunciation. The question is an interesting and imjwrtaut factor for the philological student ; but whatever its solution, there is every reason to consi«ler that when the Cliinese ideogra])lis were first introduced into Corea from t\\e north (►f China, words now pronouncetl by Cantonese with t as the final, ended originally in /, and no Chinese word thea ended in t. Regarding the pronunciation •of Chinese, apart from the evidence supplied by dialects, it is not until the fourth vi (KOREAN MANUAL. centnry A. D. that the student can find himself on sure ground. The i)ropagation of the Buddhist religion had shown the necessity of some authorized standard for the transliteration of its Ritual into ('liinese from the original Sanscrit ; and Liao I "J* ^, i\ learned priest during the time of the Tung-chin dynasty ^ ^ (A. D. 40(J), selected thirty-six Chinese ideographs to represent the initial consonants of the Sanscrit alphabet. These phonetics, afterwards modified ])y Slien Yo j^ f^ (A. U. 500) with the collaboration of certain Hindoo priests, continued to be tlie standard jn-onunciation of Sanscrit in C'hinese until A. D. 1376, when they were finally revised and reduced to thirty-one phonetics — ^tlie three characters j^ ^ \^ representing three cerebrals of the Sanscrit being included under tlie corresi)onding palatals ; i% under ^ ; and ^ under ^ ; the sounds respectively being considered identical in Chinese. These thirty-one ideogi-aphs are now known as the " Hung Wu Cheng Yiin" ^ ^ IE tl — 77^^ Phonetics of Hmg Wu (the first Emperor of the Ming dynasty). These phonetics form an important link in the liistory of the invention of the Corean alphabet ; and a comparison of them with the Sanscrit equivalents will supply the key to the grouping and pronunciation ef the Corean lett^ers. At the same time they are equally interesting as regards the Corean value of the sound of the C/hinese [ideographs and illustrate certain modifications that have occurred in aspirates or have otherwise aifected the language. The initial sound of each ('hinese phonetic was intended to represent the value of a corresponding letter in Sanscrit and, tabulated as known and used by Corean scholars in the fifteenth century, they show as follows : — 1. The initial consonant sound in j^. ^, ^, ^ represents the Sanscrit gutturals n, h, kh and g ; which in C^orean passed into ^ (7ig), y (/-) and ^ {It) respectively. The Sanscrit sonant gh found no equivalent in Chinese. In^ Corean all distinction between surd and sonant has been neglected — colloquially the two sounds are interchangeable but made unconsciously on the i)art of the speaker, and accordingly the Corean y may be read k or g. The initial nasal ^ of the Corean corresponding to tlie Sanscrit ??, was always so faint that it had early disappeared as a distinct initial ; its place was taken by the spiritas leyiis represented by the circle Q- w^ii^^^^ again in its turn became modified until it resembled the present nasal final ^ — a series of changes naturally resulting from the Corean system of writing down the i)age with a Chinese pen or brush. 2. The initial consonants in ^, ^, ^, ^ represent the Sanscrit dentab n, t, th and cJ, which in Corean jmssed into l* (/?) c (0 ^^^ S (^')- ^'^»e Sanscrit dk had no equivalent in Chinese : while in Corean all distinction of surd and Fonant was neglected and only one letter t required as an initial with its aspirated form f. 3. In C'Orean the trill Q here follows, being defined as the initial sound in the Chinese character which in these phonetics was selected to rei)resent the Sanscrit semi-vowels / and r. In (-orean this trill is properly a sound ranging IXTRODUCTION. vii l)etween the two j^^'onuuciatious, uenrer r as an iuitiiti but approaeliino^ what may best be exphiiued as a soft, modified / wlieu final. But iu transliteratiug Chinese words possessiug: / as tlie initial, the C'oreans were unequal to the true phonetic value of the letter, and while retaining / wherewith to indicate the original sound, they modified and merged this distinct / pronunciation of the Chinese root into ??, and then, following the peculiarities of the C\)rean vocalization of this letter they further modulated this v and finally dropped it in many words as a distinct initial consonant sound. This principle affecting the value and sound of n is likewise exemplified iu ( 'orean by the transliteration of the Sanscrit guttural, cerebral and palatal sounds of ;?, which as initial consonant sounds have entirely disappeared from Corean ; they luive been regularly replaced by the open vowel initial. 4. In transliterating the Sanscrit labials w, ^, jjh and h the Chinese introduced a variation in their pronunciation, iu order to express the distinction of sounds in p and h wlien modulated and softened intoy and v resjiectively. These allied sounds the Chinese classified as /^^ffryand liijht labials. The heavy labials are Bfl. ^. ^ 3& and correspond exactly with the Sanscrit m, p, ph and b ; whereas the three characters ^, ^^. ^ are considered light hibials and represent the modified corres- ponding sounds of f, f (defined in Chinese as f. clear) and f (defined as f thick), derived respectively from m, p and b. This divergence in pronunciation has been carried fidly into modern C-hinese, giving m, p and p' {p aspirated) the heavy labials as above ; while w and f reproduce the light labials — the aspirated or thick / disappearing. The Corean vocalization on the other hand, is characterized by great simplicity and reguhirity. No regard was paid to any distinction between surd and sonant, nor did the aspirated p ever pass into / as seen in Chinese and in our modern English, where ph has the force and value of/. The Corean letters D B JE were taken to represent the Sanscrit m, p and ph {p aspirated). As regards the Chinese, however, there can be no question but that in selecting the ideograph ^ they intended to represent the Sanscrit semi-vowel ?% a sound entirely unknown iu Corean. Neither in Chinese nor in Corean is there any equivalent of the Sanscrit bh. In short it mav well be regarded as the invariable rule that where to appears as the initial sound of words in modern Mandarin pronunciation, its place is taken bv b in Japanese, by a soft or modulated m in Corean and by v in the Shanghai dialect. 5. In the use of tlie Chinese characters ^, ^ ^ and ^ i|||^ we discern the attempt to reproduce the sounds respectively of the Sanscrit palatals c, ch and jh and cerebrals t, th and dh. But in Corean with no distinction between palatal and cerebral or between surd and sonant, these sounds became conjoined and were represented by two letters, viz : 7C=r// and y;,=cU (eh aspirated). The Chinese, however, were further able by means of the initial sound in such words as t 15 g,, &c., to indicate the value of the Sanscrit ;, calling it half palatal and half viii • CORE AN MANUAL. cerebral. Tlie Coreans in tlieir first attempts to formulate an alphabet, followed the (Hiinese classification of sounds of the fifteenth century A. D. and invented the triangular letter A to represent this ; of the Chinese. But, as nlvendy explained, the pronunciation of this sound was outside the range of their current vocalization. The letter itself early disappeared from their alphabet and was replaced by the open vowel initial, which indicates the regular pronunciation of the Coi'ean vernacular. Originally in C-orean these (lu'nese derivatives were read with 7? as their initial, and this n is still used in Japanese pronunciation of Cliiuese ideographs. But in ( \)reau the 91 sound was always faint and modulated until eventually it was dropped — a phonetic modification still exemjilified in the modern vernacular, where as »regards words jiurely (/Orean in their origin, ?? before the vowel /, &c., is constantly elided and made to disappear as a distinct initial consonant sound. 6. By means of the Chinese characters »iJ» and f^ the original intention in respect to their selection was to indicate the variants between s and z. As regards ^ and H, the object was to mark the UKKlificatious of these two sibilants s and z into sk and zh respectively, i.e., where the sibilant is softened by the i)reseuce of an ontbreathing. While ,s and s/t have remained as distinct regular sounds iu modern Chinese, the two initials 2 and s// have undergone certain modifications, jiassing into /is and sh according to the position of the outbreatlu'ug. Thus ^ iu Maudai'in is now pronounced /(siek and j|| as s/^ath This latter Chinese character has, however, a strong aspirate when used iu Buddhist books, ranging in value from c/t' aspirated of ck^an to s (aspirated),*ap])roac]iing z (aspirated) ins/tan of the modern jn'onunciation. These four Chinese j)houetics were selectetl to represent the sounds of tlie Sanscrit sibilants ; but to the Corean ear such minuteness of distinction was too cumbersome and only one letter A (s) was required to represent these four Chinese initial sounds. At the same time the yalue of the original sounds was not without its effect on the j)ronunc,iation of the Corean transliteration, and in many Chinese words now commencing with an initial s/i, we find Coreans likewise modifying their initial s sound and unconsciously reproducing an approximation to'^^/' oi'l/ts according as the outbreathing/c follows or precedes the sibilant s. In ( -hinese words originally showing z&s their initial, Coreans now follow their s sound by ay, but so modified tliat the s is emphasized while the y is merged into the pronunciation of the vowel immediately following with the effect of lengthening its value. 7. So far the Chinese had adhered to the Sanscrit classification into gutturals, })alatals, cerebrals, dentals, labials and sibilants. But in regard to the vowels or semi-vowels and the asj)irate, this strict sequence and identity of correspondence between their phonetics and the Sanscrit alphabet could no longer be maintained. In resj)ect to words o])ening with a vowel sound, a distinction was drawn in the (/hiuese ])honetics between an open clear vowel initial and the modified nasal n as the initial. For the former the character l^ was' selected and read you or yu in Corean, and as written ^ the circle O was taken as mTRODUCTION. ix indicative of its value as an open initial. On the other hand, instead of the open vowel initial the nUsal n appears in certain Chinese sounds as their initial which, when followed by the vowels y or ^■, were read with an enunciation corresponding with the n in Spanish. Only in Chinese this initial n was very faint, and as a nasal scarcely perceptible. But the sound had its distinct presence and influence on the language, so much so that in the fifteenth century the Coreans invented a special letter to indicate its individuality, viz : ^ composed of the circle O of the spirittis ■ lenis with a diacritical mark like a hyphen ( — ) over it, thereby representing the affinity of the two sounds, both in writing and in pronunciation. The Chinese character ^ with its original sound of "^yeng, for which the character ^ waa subsequently used, was selected as the phonetic typical of this initial semi-vowel. But the true use and value of this nasal n as an initial can be best studied from its Corean pronunciation, both as regards words indigenous to the language and especially in derivatives assimilated from Chinese, where there is a regular tendency to elide the nasal n before y or ?. Thus nikta is read ikta (ripe). nyang •pan „ „ yang fan (gentleman.) ^^ nyeit ckyek „ „ yeit chyek (ancient.) ^l^ nyem nye „ „ yem ye (anxiety.) &c., &c. The Coreans drop the w as a distinct sound, leaving a sound which is practically only an open vowel initial, though at times the presence of the nasal n can be clearly detected in the utterance of certain speakers. As regards Chinese, however, the Shanghai dialect stUl preserves this nasal n initial as a regular consonant in conjunction with the words y and ?, as may be seen in the following examples : — Shanghai. Corean. Peking. J^ nioh ouel yiieh lAl pn mun eun ym niung yeng ying nion ouen ytian nick ok ytt nti g ytt nil ou ytt COREAN MANUAL. 8. As regards aspirates, the Chinese maintained the distinction between the soft sibilant aspirate approximating nearest to the sound of sh as- heard in pleasure, etc., and the guttural aspirate proper in horn, etc. ; and the two characters selected as representative of the two sounds were ^ and g, read respectively in Corean kyo and hap. This h in ^ has not, however, the distinct aspirate sound ; it contains rather the rudiments of a faint s modified by an outbreathing and generally written hs for the transliteration of Chinese ideographs. Both in Cantonese and Corean the pronunciation agree in ignoring this s sound and retain the regular aspirate h, viz t 1iiu=hyo. But in Shanghai and Peking the presence of the 5 sound asserts itself to the exclusion practically of the aspirate proper, and ^ is then read Kio in Shanghai {h^z=.ks) and ksiao in Peking. In the Corean vernacular both sounds were represented by '§', but in pronunciation this letter is found passing regularly into a modified s before the Towels i or y. This change from a guttural aspirate to a sibilant aspirate is made unconsciously by Coreans, while on the other hand, the true sibilant itself, in many words as uttered by uneducated Coreans, passes into a regular aspirate. As originally invented this letter '§' was intended to represent the sound of the sibilant aspirate (hs, sh), while in order to mark the proper guttural aspirate h the letter "q" was to be reduplicated, thus '^■Q=hh, thereby accentuating the identity and affinity of the two sounds ; and in many books, even as late as the seventeenth century, thia combination of letters indicating the strong guttural aspirate occurs constantly in Buddhist liturgies. Accordingly the Chinese character |g, the representative of this initial consonant, was first transliterated in Corean 'o'^=hhap. But this nicety of distinction was early abandoned as too cumbersome ; and regardless of philological accuracy the letter 'o "^^^ made to represent both the guttural or true aspirate and the sibilant aspirate indiscriminately. As regards the pronunciation of the Chinese character ||^, the ancient sound, as also the Corean and Cantonese, all agree in the value of h as the strong guttural aspirate, viz : hap. In Shanghai it is also read ha with the regular aspirate, but in modern Mandarin the guttural has given place to the sibilant aspirate, and ^ always read hsia ; the proper transliteration of such sounds {lis, h\ sh, etc.) has been a fertile source of learned disquisition by sinologues and others. But the general consensus is that the outbreathing of the aspirate precedes the sibilant, and that hs rather than sh indicates the correct pronunciation. These thirty-one phonetics of Hung Wit supply the key to the order and arrangement of the Corean alphabet. The sounds were divided into two main groups — iH clear and ^ thick — each again divided into ^ wholly and p^ less, according as the pronunciation of the letter was soft or hard. Unaspirated letters came under j^, aspirates under j^, while sonants proper were classed under tJij j^. Followiug the Sanscrit classification these sounds were farther subdivided into gutturals, palatals, dentals, labials, sibilants, aspirates, etc. In regard to the INTRODUCTION. xi pronunciation of these phonetics, Coreans were at the time of the invention or their alphabet guided not by the sounds with which they themselves read the Chinese ideographs, but by their value and use as current in China at the beginning of the fifteenth century. For this special purpose the Coreans consulted the Chinese scholar ^ ^ Huang Ts'an, then living as an exile from China on their N. W. frontier beyond the Yaloo River. Several missions were sent by the King of Corea ^^ to obtain his assistance in elucidating the correct pronunciation of the Chinese characters. We can thus understand and explain the Chinese and the Corean vocalization of these phonetics, in several of which the differences are very marked and important. In these phonetics the Chinese characters are to be read with their sounds as recognized in the early years of the Ming dynasty A. D. 1400. But according to Corean scholars, the Corean pronunciation of Chinese goes back to the eleventh century B.C., and shows great modifications as compared with these phonetics^ The ideograph Q is transliterated il in Corean, but the presence of a faint nasal n can be traced in some dialects of modern Chinese and especially in Japanese. The ancient reading of the character is acknowledged to be nyit, and the sound of the nasal n may best be defined as ranging between the Sanscrit palatals J and n ; and this may help to supply the clue to the divergence in the pronunciation of Q as nichi in Japanese, n^ik in Shanghai, compared with jih of the Ming dynasty and of modern Mandarin. The disappearance of this initial ?i in Corean is in strict conformity with the principles regulating Corean euphony, whereby this initial n before the vowels i or y passes into a faint nasal and finally disappears as a distinct sound, both in their vernacular and especially in their pronunciation of Chinese. Compare L=| :^, which is transliterated nyeheiil but read yeheul (a cascade) ; L^ g transliterated nyer&m but read yeram (spring) ; *^ Ah ^| nipsakoui but read ipsakoui (a leaf), etc., etc. Finally, we have only to study the regular pronunciation in the Shanghai vernacular to understand and appreciate the true value and use of this nasal n as an initial. As regards ^ and |^ the true Corean transliteration gives no aspirate as here shown in these phonetics — they are written f^ and >^ and read kyei and pang respectively — in the forms ?^ and ^, k'yei and p'ang, we have merely a reproduction of the Chinese pronunciation of that period. As regards aspirates generally, the Corean pronunciation of Chinese presents so many anomalies that it is impossible to lay down any definite law governing their connection and use. Words are constantly occurring in Corean — words which have long been assimilated into the language — possessing strong aspirates, especially with the initial jo, such as : — ;^ = P'a; WL — P'an; A = P'al BR == p'ai ^ == p'il iJi^ = p'il ^ = p'j-o etc., which in Chinese are marked by no aspirate. ♦^,i xii COREAN MANUAL. The two characters ^ and ^^ are rendered p] and HI in Corean ; but in the table of these phonetics, in order to indicate that these sounds are merely approxi- mate, the labials are divided into two categories — g heavy or strong and $2 light or modulated; and the two characters are accordingly placed under the light or modulated^ in order to show that the m and p sounds of the Corean transliteration require to be softened and modified so as to approach the Chinese pronunciation of u (=:v=w) in wei and of / in fei. In Corean, however, there are only two labials proper, viz : m and j», for the aspirated jo is never modified into^but always remains a distinct labial, viz : p followed by a strong outbreathing. While Coreans did not require any special form of letter to mark sonants as distinct from swds — the two sounds being interchanged in their daily speech, yet the authors of the alphabet were fully aware of the difierence ; and finding that the checks and sibilant were pronounced in Corean with a special emphasis- so as to produce a new and allied sound, they very accurately represented this peculiarity of the Corean language by reduplicating these consonants, thereby indicating at the same time their true value and pronunciation, viz : yj=kk=g ; HH= ppz=b ; tZ}[Z=ii=d; 7;^=chch=j and m=s5=«. And these reduplicated letters were originally intended to convey the sound and pronunciation of the sonants y, b, d, J and z as found in the Hung Wu phonetics. This principle was likewise carried into the aspirate, which in its guttural form they represented by ^'Q=hh in contra- distinction to sibilant aspirate •^=hs or sh. This reduplicated form, indicating the true aspirate, appears regularly in Corean transliterations of Buddhist books ; but in modern writing the two sounds are no longer difierentiated, though in their colloquial the sibilant and guttural aspirates regularly occur. The following Table shows the Hung Wu phonetics with their corresponding Corean letters and sounds : — INTRODUCTION. xui ^ ^x ^ f: m IE # ^ ft- 4i tt ^] 6 H " M 7i 7 ^b 03^ 2: ^S. »J D I ^j- H A^ A ^ X >a X -^ o ^ ^ 22 ff >7 ^ ^ en ^1 ^ Z2. o ^ ^ cc HH m n JA m Ml 7v? p Mi M ir oo xiY COREAN MAjS^UAL. Both Buddhist and national records concur in ascribing the honour of invent- ing the Corean alphabet to the fourth King of the present dynasty ; and assign the year A. D. 1447 as the date of its official publication. The President of the Board of Ceremoniesin the proclamation he issued in terms of the Royal Edict on the subject, recapitulates the great advantages accruing to the Corean student in possessing an alphabet equal to the correct transliteration of native words and Chinese ideographs. He refers especially to the clumsy system introduced by Syel Ch'ong |^ ^„ the Buddhist priest who, towards the close of the seventh century A. D., arbitrarily selected certain Chinese characters to represent Corean inflection and agglutination on the same principle as the Japanese now use their Kana characters (fg ^). And this Ifido 1^ 1^ syllabary, as it has been termed, still remains in constant use among petty officials — hence the name. The present Corean aljjhabet 'owes its origin to the promptings of native ambition on the part of the King and Government to figure as an independent State. The Corean Envoys at the Court of the Ming Emperors found that all States having relations with China, possessed a literature and script of their own and distinct from Chinese. A school of languages had long been established in Nanking for the purpose of training Chinese as official interpreters and for conducting correspondence with neighbouring countries in their own vernacular. The King of Corea, eager to mark the individuality and independence that he claimed for his State, was desirous of abandoning Chinese as the official script of his Government. With the assistance of the Envoys who had acquired at Nanking a knowledge of the difi^erent alphabets in use by countries bordering on China, viz., Mongol, Thibetan, Burmese ; and especially of Sanscrit, which was then largely studied in connection with Buddhist liturgy and ritual, the King evolved the present Corean alphabet, consisting of twenty-eight letters (now reduced to twenty-five) and ordered its adoption by his people and officials to the exclusion of Chinese. Native conservativism, however, proved insurmountable, and Cliinese has continued to be used as the medium of correspondence, both by officials and by the educated classes generally — the native script being relegated to women and the uneducated masses. But for purposes of education, especially in transliterating Chinese, the Corean alphabet has a recognized place ; and the Chinese classics have accordingly been rendered in the vernacular to assist the student to the correct meaning and pro- nunciation of Chinese ideographs. While drawing on the Hung Wu phonetics as above explained for the lounds and order of their alphabet, the Coreans went to the Sanscrit direct for the form of their letters. Since the first appearance of Buddhism in Corea at the end of the fourth century A. D., Sanscrit has been regularly studied by the Corean priest- hood, who were long the sole repositories of literature in the country and wielded a powerful influence accordingly. Even as late as the seventeenth century, Corean IXTRODUCTIOy. XV monks made a special study of Sanscrit and wi'ote learned disquisitions elucidating its history in connection with Chifiese and Corean. The Sanscrit alphabet passed from India through Thibet into China, and by the time it finally reached Corea the letters had been subjected to great modifica- tions, necessitate from the circumstance that they had to be written, down the page/ with a Chinese pen or rather brush, instead of horizontally with the Indian reed. Again under Corean hands this Sanscrit alphabet was further transformed, much as English print difiers from English writing — the Coreans curtailed and modified the square or angular shaped letters of the Sanscrit into- a short cursive script for convenience and speed in wi-iting. And it is from this cursive script that the Coreans have evolved the form and construction of the letters of their alphabet. In addition to the consonants of the Sanscrit alphabet, the other letters were all variously altered and modified ; the divergences in some instances being very marked and striking. But these changes may all be studied in the exemplars given in the Buddhist Ritual of Incantation, known as the Chen En Chip ^ g* ^, an early Corean transliteration of the Sanscrit original with their Chinese equivalents re-published in 1778 A. D. This work likewise contains some interesting information regarding the Sanscrit alphabet as first introduced into Corea, and explains the modifications which the letters, both vowels and consonants, have undergone at the hands of the Buddhist priests to meet the difficulties of writing with a Chinese pen or brush. A knowledge of these changes and the principles governing their use, is essential to the student in tracing the identity between Sanscrit proper, written across the page, and Corean Sanscrit, wiitten down the page in syllabary forms. And it is this Sanscrit syllabary combination that supplies the key to the present system of Corean writing, whereby two or more letters — one vowel with one or two consonants — are regularly grouped into one logotype. As regards the Corean alphabet, so far as the consonants are shown as having been derived from the Sanscrit in the above table, there only remains one more consonant calling for special attention and study. When originally introduced into Corea, the Sanscrit semi-vowel y was written ^ but reduced to the form 2^ for printed books. The letter, however, was further modified for purposes of their cursive script into the four forms =i, «i:i', JJ , ^, and from these latter the Coreans drew their four letters possessing y as their initial sound, viz : f: , ^ , j^,, 7f , ya, ye, yo andy^w ; the connecting link of identification being found in the current Corean script. As regards the perpendicular stroke of the Corean, tJie principle corresponds with the horizontal or top line of the Sanscrit writing, on to wl^ich the letters proper were respectively attached. The annexed table will show the series of changes which the Sanscrit letters have undergone before their final modification into the present letters representing the Corean alphabet : — XYl COREAN MANUAL. Sanscrit Consonants as introduced into Corea in the IVth Century AD. 5^ as used in the XYth century A.D. as printed. ^ ^ ^ ^ H as written. ^ yy X Modern Corean Consonants as written. A^ ^ X '7 7 5 A L as printed. ^. 7 W A 6 11 t tr m P s ng cli h t J INTRODUCTION. xvii As regards vowels, the modificationa effected in the Sanscrit letters in different Buddhist books since their first introduction in the fourth century, have been both numerous and complicated, so much so that their identification has become practically hopeless as regards the principles guiding their evolution and construction. But while the mere shape of the letters afibrds no information to the student, the clue to their determination is supplied in the classification and order of the different vowel sounds, accompanied by their Corean transliteration and Chinese equivalents. This is more especially apparent for the vowel sounds of the Sanscrit i and Iri. As taught to Coreans the Sanscrit vowels comprise a medley of dots, curves and strokes totally unlike their Sanscrit originals ; whereas for purposes of writing in combination with the consonants, the vowel letters were further reduced to one or two short dots and curves. Thus the vowel i appears regularly as a curved stroke somewhat like a half circle ( to the left of the consonant, with which it was combined and formed a sylla- bary. The short vowel a was treated exactly as in the regular Sanscrit — inherent and part of each consonant sound. But the two open Sanscrit vowels a and a were taught under the forms 5i and z^, which latter were again further reduced to 2^ and 2j^ for purposes of their current script in Sanscrit ; and the right hand half of these letters supply the key to the Corean y a, which in their vernacular running hand was generally written with the distinctive dot or dash towards the foot of the letter. Where, however, the a sound was less prolonged the Sanscrit vowels were reduced to a mere appending hook, like a comma, placed to the right of the consonant, and this was further reduced for Corean into the dot under the consonant for a short. The Sanscrit o was modified by the Corean Buddhist scholars into a series of short curves over each other ; but where combined with a consonant in syllabary form these curves were connected so as to make a short wavy line under the consonant, and this latter form, together with the abbreviated modification vs^ used in the Sanscrit sound om, transliterated pg in Chinese, supplies the key to the prototype of the Corean vowel JL (o), which in their cursive script approximates nearest to the modified Sanscrit original. These modifications of the Sanscrit vowels and the four derivatives from the semi-vowel y, widely divergent as they are from their originals, fully illustrate and establish the principle which guided the Coreans in the selection and construction of the letters to indicate the vowel sounds of their language. But in tracing their formation, reference must always be had to the Corean cursive script as giving the key to their identification w^ith their Sanscrit originals. The sharp angular form of the Corean letters in printed books was subsequently adopted to suit the exigencies of the engraver and facilitate his labours in cutting the wooden blocks from which their books were printed ; angles and squares under such conditions would naturally present fewer difficulties than curves and circles. Coreans, however, continue to employ the cursive script — the Chinese pen, or rather brush, naturally lending itself to this form which, as thus written, offers a striking resemblance to the Sanscrit seen xviii COREAN MANUAL. on leaflets and charms obtainable for a few cash per sheet by Buddhist devotees at Corean temples. While as regards vowels the identification between Corean and Sanscrit is far from easy, and in some measure neither complete nor satisfactory, for consonants on the other hand, the process of gradual transformation from Sanscrit to the present Corean letters is both clear and self-evident. But the student, desirous of further prosecuting his investigations on the subject of the Corean alphabet, is referred to the Chen En Chip :^ "s ^ and other Buddhist works. Four epochs mark the history of civilization and literature in Corea : — I. The introduction of Chinese writing by Ki Tzu 3^ -^ in 1122 B. C. II. The propagation of the Buddhist religion by missionaries (Chinese, Hindu and Thibetan) from China in the fourth century A. D. III. The revival of letters during the if j^ Silla dynasty, 449-920 A. D. IV. The invention of the present Corean alphabet in 1447 A. D. As a race the Coreans claim an antiquity dating back some two thousand years B. C. Tradition and history concur in ascribing the valley of the head-waters of the Sungari liiver as the cradle of their ancestors. At present two separate characteristics of type mark the people — the Manchu, tall of stature with well cut features, and the Japanese witli its distinctive individualities of build and physiog- nomy ; and these characteristics are further borne out alike by tradition and by the history of the people. Originally a congeries of rude tribes scattered over the Corean peninsula, their land became the happy hunting ground of their northern neighbours, who impelled by the pressure of population and the severity of climate have, in obedience to a universal law of expansion, pushed their way southwards into warmer regions and more genial surroundings. The aborigines driven from their homes by these invaders from the north made their way into Southern Japan across the narrow straits through the Tsushima Islands, which in early years belonged to Corean domination. Apart from racial identification of type between modern Japanese and the ancient inhabitants of the Corean peninsula, Japanese have likewise a tradition that their own original home lay to the west, where the sun sank to rest in the ocean ; and their oldest historical records declare that they "descended from heaven in a boat" — clearly proving their Western origin from across the Tsushima Straits. Besides, in support of this identity of origin there stands out as a clear and distinct proof, that remarkable parallelism of grammatical construction and syntax between the two languages as at present spoken, which can only be explained by unity of race in prehistoric ages. The aborigines of Japan — Aiuos — impressed their vocabulary on the immigrants from the peninsula ; but these latter were unable to abandon the grammatical construction of their sentences, which remains to emphasize the language as Corean in syntax with an Aino vocabulary. INTRODUCTION. xix Between the two countries the early history of art and literature had always been intimately associated. Corea imports and borrows from China, passing on her new civilization and literature to Japan, where the pupil more apt than the master and located in more favourable surroundings, has long outstripped Corea in the march of progress. Out of the mists of antiquity and legend, the first acknowledged date in connection with the Corean race occurs in B. C. 1122 with the introduction of Chinese literature and civilization by Ki Tzu ^ ^. Yet it is clear that even at that early period the Coreans were in possession of many elements of culture and society. A study of the native vernacular, eliminating all Chinese terms, proves the existence of a people early acquainted with the manufacture of iron and copper, but ignorant of silver and gold ; charcoal alone being employed in their reduction of these two metals, for coal does not appear among the products of the country until very recent years. Their dwellings, as evidenced from their vocabulary, were originally merely low mud huts or burrows in the ground — a style of housing which has come down to the present time and is still found among the poorer classes all over the country. The erection of proper dwellings and the system of heating their abodes by means of underground flues were arts borrowed from Chinese ; and this is further seen in the use and meaning assigned to the word pan^ '\^, derived from the Chinese ^, meaning originally room, but in Corean vernacular conveying an idea always associated with the heating of the floor of the room. As regards their numerals, one of the most important points in philology in respect to primitive races, Coreans are especially interesting. Only from 1 to 99 do they possess numerals which are unquestionably Corean in their origin. This limit up to 99 shows that their ideas and notions of property could not have been large-— a primitive race with few requirements. But as the people advanced with the spread of civilization from contact with China, the Chinese numerals were imported to supply the deficiences of the native vocabulary. And the identity of sound with which the numerals from 1 to 10, etc., are read as compared with their pronunciation in Cantonese, where ^ as a final replaces the I of the Corean, proves their early introduction into the latter language. As for the fauna of the country, alongside of the Chinese names there are also in current use native Corean words designating most animals, both domestic and wild. In agriculture the people must early have made great advances, and rice and grain of various kinds were always known to them as also, of course, native implements of agriculture. Possessed of a limited vocabulary suited to the requirements of a simple primitive tribe, Coreans drew on Chinese for new names and ideas necessary in their progress to a higher civilization. But all the peculiarities of Corean construction, idiomatic and grammatical, have remained unchanged ; and in many words these Chinese terms have become so incorporated and assimilated into the language that XX COREAN MANUAL. only a knowledge of Cantonese and the principles regulating Corean euphony can detect and trace their Chinese derivative. In the ^ 1^ Ok P'yen^ a Corean compilation of the 17th century, we have a clear and concise dictionary giving the Corean transliteration (with the meanings in Chinese) of all Chinese words occurring in the Corean language. A careful study of these Corean initials and finals as laid down in this dictionary and their comparison with the sounds as used in various dialects of China, especially Cantonese, may well warrant the scholar in accepting this Corean transliteration as the nearest approach to the true pronunciation of the ancient language of China — proving the great antiquity of the people and their early submission to Chinese civilization and influence. INTRODUCTION. XXI SPECIMENS OF COREAN WRITING. (a) The square printed form. ^ 51 § -f S I ^ ^ A >2 A> :!: ^ ± ^] ^ -? *l S ^ ^ ^ 4 -& 'S (6) The cursive script ordinarily employed in letters and cheap editions of Corean novels. COREAN MANUAL. ALPHABET. mllE Carean Alphabet consists of twenty-five different letters, comprising eleven vowels and fourteen consonants. Three of the latter, however, possess a double si^ification and use depending on their position in the word or syllable ; as an initial, ^ is the mute (or pro-consonant) preceding an open vowel sound, but as a final is always read ng\ cL as an initial has the somid of r or n, but as a final that of l; and>^ as an initial s, but when final t. Coreans do not employ their Alphabet as in European languages, letter succeeding letter from left to right in horizontal lines; they group the words into syllables, and write in perpendicular columns commencing from the right hand top corner. Each word is broken up into its component syllables consisting of at least one vowel or diphthong with one consonant, either initial or final; and never more than three consonants and one vowel or diphthong can bo grouped into one syllable. Thus in kakera, go, we have the word broken up into three syllables ka-ke-ra p\ 74 ^JL ; 07iera, come, into o-?ie-ra JJ^ yA ^ ; care being always taken so to divide the syllables, as to be indicative of the base or root of the word, viz : ka and o respectively in the words before us. No vowel can stand unsupported by an initial consonant; and, where tliere is no vocalized or pronounced consonant somid, the letter ^ is prefixed, being always in this position mute, with a force and usage similar to the cipher zero (o) in English. Hence the name "pro-consonant;" assigned to it. Just as -y corresponds to the spiritus asper, so O may very properly be called the spiritus lenis, indicating an open initial vowel sound, these two breathings having their correlation in Corean significantly marked by the forms of the letters representing their sounds. All the fourteen consonants can stand as initials preceding the vowel or diphthong of the syllable, but only seven single 2 ' ' COEEAN MANUAL. consonants, 7 A:, 2- ^' ''^ ^'^' ^ ^^' ^ ^'^' "^ i^ ^^^^ >*• ^' ^^^^ *^^^'®® double consonants, "^1 ZA;, -jj Im and ^^ /p, can be used as finals. In conjunction with the vowels 6 1- a, 6h ya, 64 e, OT ?/e and ^1 i, the initial consonant or pro-consonant is written prefixed to the left of the vowel, but with 6^ o, ^^ yo, -$- on, Jrt« you, 6^ eu and C a, it is always placed directly above them. The final consonant or consonants come in every case directly under the vowel: ^ pal, foot, ^ talk, fowl. In ^.^ 0!^, clothes, the letter 6 is the mute or pro-consonant always pre- fixed to the vowel proper in the absence of a regular pronounced consonant sound, and used merely for symmetry in writing. As known and taught among Coreans, their alphabet is a pure syllabary, and the term en moun 6^ — -|- %^~^ includes both vowels and con- sonants, and means "vernacular literature" in contradistinction to chinsye^^ /A ^^ "true script," i.e. the Chinese written character. CONSONANTS. The Consonants may be classified thus — 1. Four sharp checks, ... p Jc, ')i 2^, "C ^ (final ^ ) and ^ c//-, 2. Four aspirated checks, ... ^ k', 32. i^', -^ i' and jt, cJi\ 3. Fourreduplicated checks, ... -^ kk,lSid pp,'^'^ tt smdZ^ chch. 4. Three nasals, ... y^ n, xi m and final ^ ng, 5. Spiritus lenis, ... 6 silent initial, or pro-con son ai;t. 6. Spiritus asper, ... 'ST h, aspirate. 7. One sibilant, ... ^A initial s. with its reduplication ... J^ ss. 8. One trill, ... -^ I final, and r or n initial. PEOXUXCIATIO^' OF COXSONANTR. ASPIBATED CHECKS. The value of the breathing in the four aspira,ted checks is exactly ^hat of the sp'uitus asper uttered with a strong out-breathing, and always after th3 consonant. Complete contact takes place in pronouncing the consonant ; the breath is gathered and allowed to explode audibly and forcibly, directlj'this contact is withdrawn. In Corean there is no modifying or softening of the sharp checks in conjunction with the aspirate sound, such SjS ph into f in philosophy, or th as seen in hath or hatlic. In Corean each sound is clear and distinct, first the check and then the aspirate. In transliterating these letters I have therefore adhered to the analogy of the Corean original, where the diacritical mark — is placed over the ordinary check, and used the forms A*',^', t' and ch\ instead of kh, ph th and chh, in which last the presence of h might suggest the modification of the cliecks with the softened sounds, ph, th, etc, of the English language. Again, as the aspirate sound invariably follows the consonant, the forms hk, hp,ht and hch are inaccurate and misleading, and therefore inadmissible. REDUPLICATED CHECKS AND SIBILANT. Besides these ordinary and aspirated forms, the four checks, k, p, t and ch, are frequently pronouncsd by Coreans at the beginning of a syllable with so strong an emphasis that four new and allied sounds are evolved which may very properly be termed "reduplicated" cheoks. And the name ''reduplicated'' will serve to indicate the manner in which they are written as well as pro- nounced. It appears that the Coreans, instead of inventing letters to represent these sounds, have with great discrimination and accuracy taken the ordinary check as the basis, and, to indicate that the sound was to be intensified, re- duplicated the initial consonant 'J ^ ^ "C. and ^ as necessary. In -3* kcnn, catty, we have the regular sound of the ordinary check, ^ k, but by emphasizing the initial consonant, gathering the breath, and dwelling on it with considerable pressure so that the vowel sound following it is ignored and almost lost, we produce the reduplicated sliarp check 77 kk, as in ^^^kkeun, string. Similarly \d ptje, paddy, and tiBJ ppye, bones; ^ tkl, moon, and ^ ttkl, daughter; ^L Cl cliata, I sleep, and ^L XX- clicliata, I plait. The sibilaiit s is likewise found reduplicated, the sound being intensi- fied bv pressing the tongue against the roof of the mouth, gathering the breath, and then forcibly and sharply ejecting it with a strong hissing noise. Compare J\. Ci- sata, I buy, with ■^\, "Ci- ssata, I build; in the first we have the ordmary sibilant as in English, but in the second the enunciation is sliortened^ sharpened and intensified, all emphasis and accent being concentrated on the initial consonant sound. COREAN MANUAL. Instead of reduplicating the consonant in writing, tlie Coreans generally employ ^ as a prefix to the left of "]! ^ ^ ^ and ^ to indicate the reduplicated sound ; and in a few books an initial ^ serves the same purpose. The name 5| /A -Sr ioin slot, which the Ccreans assign to this reduplication of the four checks and the sibilant, defines clearly the nature of the spelling and the character of the pronunciation, toin being the adjective participle of ^ "w* toita, thick, and referring to the thickening cf the ordinary current pronunciation of the initial check or sibilant, while ^1 „i. siot is the name by which the letter ^ is known to Coreans. As regards the vowel or diphthong immediately following the reduplicatad consonant, its quantity is naturally shortened. All breath, accent and emphasis are thrown on the initial consonant sound, and the vocal organs have neither time nor opportunity to dwell on the vowel. TBILLS. The two trills r and I are represented in Corean by the letter 2. > with the sound of / as an initial and ^ as a final. This final I does not correspond exactly to the English pronunciation of that letter; in Corean it is more softened or trilled, as may be observed from a careful study of the pro- nunciation of -^ poul, fire, -^ moul, water, etc. As an initial this letter is read n in words of Chinese derivation which possess I as the initial in their original. But in many words now assimilated into the language from Chinese, Coreans ignore the Z of the radix sound and employ V*» n in their transliteration. Thus ^ Jt^ eui-non is from ^^ I consiilt, and is always written thus, instead of $A j. eui-ron, although this latter sound is one which the Corean vocal organs are quite capable of pronouncing. EUPHONIC CHANGES. Of the seven consonants employed as finals to close a word or syl- lable, five undergo certain modifications to meet the requirements of Corean euphony, the guiding principle being ease and freedom in pronmiciation. 1. Final y k becomes ng before O 7/i or V^ 71. 2. Final ^ m approximates to the sound of ng hcioie^k. 3. Final W 71 becomes I when followed by S , 4. Final ^ 2^ becomes m before ^ m or 1*^ n. PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS. 5. Final -Am t (i) resumes its normal s somid before another,>t s. (ii) becomes n before ^ m or «^ n. And of the initial consonants the three following are subject to various euphonic changes in Corean pronunciation: 1. Initial U» n (i) becomes I when preceded by ^ (ii) is practically mute, or retains at most only a faint nasal sound, before the vowel sounds I i, 4 ye^ ;^| ^jci. 2. Initial -J" h may be heard pronounced as a faint sh sound before the vowel sounds \ i , ^ ye, ^ yei and ^ tjou. 3. Initial ^ Z is constantly modified from its true sound as a trill into a faint nasal n, in words derived from Chinese. Thus |f^7j^ is correctly transliterated in Corean ^ ^ rding-sijou, meaning cold water in the sense of drinking water, but- is pronounced nding-sou. The initial r passes into a distinct n, while the y in syoit (as we shall see later) merely prolongs the sound of the on. The rule is that, for purposes of transliteration, H. is retained to mark the original I sound of the initial letter of the radix; but in pronunciation it shades off into a faint n or ng, at times even disappearing entirely as an initial consonant sound, especially before the vowel sounds I ^, ji ye and ^j yei. This may be explained from the fact that in many words purely Corean in their origin, an initial n before these three vowels is subject to a process of modification and elision — the indolent habits so characteristic of the people as a race naturally extending to their manner of speech. Where, however, the word derived from the Chinese has become thoroughly assimilated into the language, so that to the native scholar all trace or knowledge of its derivative root has really disappeared, the consonant n is regularly resorted to, both in writing and in pronunciation. Thus the common term V|. "jl nan-ri, (pronounced nalli) meaning war, comes from the Chinese roots ^l (disorder) , and S^ (separation) , the former of which, however, when used by itself and written singly, is very correctly transliterated ^ ran in native Dictionaries. COEEAN MANUAL. We thus arrive at the following complete TABLE OF CONSONANTAL SOUNDS. y (1) k as in Jceel: Tj^kat, hat; yjrkak, each. (2) g when the k passes into a sonant : py X\kanta — ganta, I go; >y kil — gil, road; ^fl kai—gai, dog. (3) ng (final) when followed by O w or 1>- n : ^ "? ^^^ ^^^^ — ^^^^ wow/, medicinal water ; ^ 13 ^1 ^^^ neki — ne7ig neki, sufficiently. y; kk ox g: -^ kkoul—goul, honey ; TSSLkkot — got, flower; ^ k, The hard A- sound followed by a strong aspirate: ^ k'o, nose; '^k'a7, knife. ^ (1) p as in paper: y pap, food; ^1 pdi, boat, (2) W2- (final) when followed by O m or V- w : H n I -^^^ w<5^'^« — pam mekta, I eat food ; v^ *a c/top worn — cham nom, idler. Ti^ i?i? or b: ^B)| C^ ^;>aite— baita, I extract; ^rT M PP^^^^ — balli, quickly. 3Li?>' the sharp p sound followed by a strong aspirate: S^p'al, arm; ^ PJ'ijW^a, I sell; ■M'p'oimg, wind. PRONUXCIATION OF COXSOXANTS. 1^ (1) t as in top, used as an initial only : J^ ton, money ; tX- V\ ^ri, leg. (2) ch as in church. This sound is found in the two purely Corean words t^' -^ tyoheui — chyoheui, paper; O x\ tyot'a — chyot'a, good ; and also in words of Chinese origin when this consonant is followed by the vowel sounds i i, i ye, A\ yei or ^M'Jjo: XA ^ tilyeng — chikyeng, territory ; W ^J XX-tyemch'ita — chyemch'ita, I di^ane; ^1 ^ tyeichd — chyeicha, disciple ; ^ -^ tyomoTi — chyomok, section. tc. ti ^^ <-^'y ^^ ^ "CX-ttarita — darita, I beat; X^ ttdm — dam, sweat. P ^ (1) t', the sharp t sound followed by a strong aspirate, but never modified into the sonant th as in bathe: Jgi^'q/}, a saw; ,^^Veum, a crack. (2) ch', when preceding the vowel sounds | /, J ye and :^| yei \n a few words derived from the Chinese, after the manner of its prototype ti : ^ -i -g- X^i'iA:otik;iato— ch'ikoukhata, I govern; p^ Xtf^/enc/jya??^— ch'yenchyang, ceiling; ^1 ^ fyeimyen — ch'yeimyen, self respect. ^ch as in church: ^chivi, a load; ^ VX-choukta, I die. :^chch or j: ^ XX-cJichyotta—iyotta, I drive away; ^l tl chchata—yattii'y taste salt. COEEAN MANUAL. 3t c/i', the sound of ch followed by a strong aspirate: J^ ch'i))i, lance; J^ch'ong, gun; J^ XX chHpta, cold. X^ (1) n as in name: Vf. ^^nara,) kingdom; -^ XX-nopta, high. (2) I when preceded or followed by g. : \M ^^pyelno — pyello, especially; >|J- ^palno — pallo, with the foot; Vt ^ nanri — nalli, ,war. (3) mute generally as an initial before the vowel sounds \ i, "i ye and ;^| yei, sometimes shading into a faint nasal n or ng: H XX-nihta — ikta, ripe; V^l '^ nyeichyek or ngyeichyek — yeichek, ancient times ; \A ^ nyeram — yeram, summer; vl ni or ngi — i, tooth. X3 (1) m as in man : J9L mom, the body ; -^ moul, water. (2) ng (final) when followed by y k: /A y\ XX-syemkita — syengkita, I serve; yV ^ A;amA;ewi— kangkeui, cold in the head. 6 (1) spiritus lenis, or mute initial, always prefixed to vowels in the absence of a vocalised consonant, and hence termed the "pro-consonant" : CV ^1 ;%! apachi, father ; >^ (1) s when initial, as in sun: >y* S(X2?, spade ; >^\. ^ sardm, man; r a >^r J'g. sakton, wages. (2) t when final, as in hit: Tj ket, thing •^pat, field; ,5L ''^'^ot, nail. In this latter position however it is subject to two euphonic changes : («) resuming its normal s sound when followed by another^ s: y\ ^ ^^katsdro — kassaro, with a hat; J2. .j^ y^ motsseulket — mosseulket, useless thing. 10 COREAN MANUAL. (Z>) passing into an n sound when followed by x2 ^'^ or v-* n: ■^ T ^T '^^^otmekta — monmekta, I cannot eat; 31 l" ^tP^^^^^^^* — pinnata, brilliant. >^ ss or ^: ^t ^O^sseuta — zeuta, I use; -^M W- ssi^ifa — zitta, I wash ; -^ 61 'Ci' ssoita — zoita, strike upon. ^ (1) Zas in call or milk, when closing a syllable either singly or in conjunction with 7 k, n m, or "^ _p : ^nal, day; Mj'paZ, foot ; •3*1 XX'mdlMa, clear; -^ X^salmta, I boil; .>^ V\-syelpta, I grieve. (2) r as in carry, when between two vowels, or a vowel and the aspirate ^ '• " '^JLniara, don't ; ^ ' ^ Vl naranim, king ; I ' "^ Cl marhdta, I speak. (3) ^ (initial) in words derived from the Chinese, in which a distinct I sound appears in the roots: M H. ^^^^^ pronounced ndiil coming day, i.e. to-morrow ; ^ ^f loin pronounced noin old man. S\ ^ loisyeng, pronounced noisyeng, thunder. (4) almost mute initial with a faint nasal sound before the vowel sounds I i, A ye and ^| yei, in words derived from the Chinese : "t51 »*«" — i, profit; T^ ^ ^jHrryengsakoan — yengsakoan, consulate; wj V ^ ryeimo — yeimo, manners. PEONUNCIATION OF VOWELS. 11 VOWELS. The Corean Alphabet contains eleven vowels : — Ol. a ^ o ^6^ 6|: ya ^ yo 6\ en ^ e (6, or u) J2- ou (u) 6 ii (short) ye (yo, or yii) ^ you (yu) PBONUNCIATION AND TBANSLITEBATION. In transliterating these vowels I have deemed it advisable, apart from other considerations, to adhere to the system introduced by the French missionaries in their Dictionnaire Goreen-Fran(;ais and Grammaire Corccnfie, two monuments of painstaking accuracy and erudition. No doubt to the employment of the letter e to represent the vowel sound tA some exception may legitimately be taken by an English student. The letter o supplemented by a series of diacritical marks might at first sight appear more appropriate. But when we come to a careful consideration of the diphthong combinations derived from this vowel, the use of the letter o associated with diacritical marks will be found attended with greater difficult- ies than the employment of the single letter e. Certainly experience proves that the forms e, ye, ei and yei will be much less perplexing to the student, and will help to convey a clearer idea of the pronunciation of their sounds, than can ever be done by oi, ydi, etc. In these diphthongs ei and yei exhibit in their transliteration the value of the use of the English e, and correspond very much with ei in eight and ye in yea. For the vowel CA itself, no single letter can, for purposes of transliteration, properly define or determine its phonetic value. The somid varies in different words, even in those of the same spelling in Corean. As a general rule it approaches nearest to the "neutral" vowel in err, verge, sir, bird, absurd, ranging from 6 short in closed syllables to il short in words where the vowel sound is somewhat more prolonged. The letters e and ye then are only to be accepted as symbols for the Corean vowels 64 and (d — the least objectionable under the circumstances, and especially as obviating elaborate diacritical marks. At the same time the simplicity and regularity of the Corean alphabet will early enable the student, to dispense with all adventitious aids derived from any system of symbols which, however carefully selected for purposes of transliteration, can at best only give an approximation to the vowel sound. 12 COREAN MANUAL. The vowels 6|» _y^ and J2»are clear, open and distinct, and in sound are fairly represented by their English equivalents a, o and on, in father, soft and uncoutlt, while in quantity they are found pronounced either long or short; occasionally they are so prolonged that, judging from the analogy of a few words, it would seem that they must have been follovved by the vowel ^ eu, and that this must have been gradually dropped in writing — an abbrevi- ation to which the Corean' script, down the page, would naturally lend itself. The vowel ^| has likewise a long and short sound ranging from the long i in ravine to the sliortened vocalization in pin, kin ; but it never possesses the broad sound of i in light, life, etc. In 6 we have normally the French sound eu reproduced and in its diphthong combinations this phonetic is especially apparent ; but occasionally this vowel is modified so as to approximate to the sound of t or ^ in jwf?/. The vov/el 6 is known to Coreans as ar&i a or lower a in contra- distinction to the regular open a sound, which they term ouei a, or upper a; in pronunciation its sound may behest defined as the sound of d short, but more quickly enunciated and occasionally merging into the sound of 6 eu, especially in participles and in the Oppositive Case. In the four forms 6i; ra ^^ and -S* we have a series of compound or double vowels constantly occurring in Corean, and consisting of a ^ sound prefixed to the simple vowels a, e, o and ou, viz : ya, as in the Enghsh word yard; ye, as in yeoman; yo, as in yore; and you, as in youth. But in many Corean words, and especially after an initial >u or ^ the effect of this y sound is merely to lengthen the pronunciation of its radix vowel, with which it coalesces so as practically to disappear, A knowledge of this use and practice will greatly assist the student to a correct pronunciation of many words in Corean: w (how many) is B]}elt niyet, but read met, as in the English met; in -^v^ (the native name for the kingdom of Corea), th y merely lengthens the vowel sounds o and e, which are then read with a value and quantity much as in English — Chosen. The name for the capital of the 'country >^ ^^has given rise to constant vagaries, both in pronunciation and in transliteration. The Corean spelling is dissyllabic, >A^ sye, read sc, where e has the sound of the " neutral " vowel, or tir vocal, heard ' in err, sir, etc., and ^^ Old, where ou has the English u sound heard in youth, pronounced, however, with a shorter accent, and nearer the u in pull than the corresponding sound inpool. There is, however, a constant tendency on the part of students to elision, reducing the sound to one syllable, with the pronunciation of Syoul (rhyming with school), a word ^g" which ni Corean means ivmc. PRONUNCIATION OF YOVrELS. 13 TABLE OF VOWEL SOUNDS. 6l a as in father: ^hmal, language; "^|- niat, taste. C>U{1) 2/a a.s in yard: ^^yak, medicine; ^^7iyang 100 casli. (2) when preceded by -A or^ ,tlie y is almost dropped, leaving merely a lengthened a sound : ^h "Si syang-hdi — sang-hai, always; .^ \M "o "Ct- c/z^/nrZ^T/eZ/iafo— chakpyelhata, I say farewell. 6-| e as in herd (neutral vowel), with a sound ranging from d short to u short and a pronunciation that varies even in words of the same spelling: ^ ^ enfek — dntok, a slope; hut (A .^jmeroun — uroun, elder; Cn ^Cl- cpta — opta, I carry; but 61 'CX'Cpta — iipta, I have not ; XA XX-tepta — t(;pta I cover; but X^ X^ tepto. — tupta, warm. OT [1) ycdu^ in yeoman: ra ^ yere, several; OT ^JA yekeui, here. (2) when preceded by^ ro -^ ,the y is almdst dropped, leaving a lengthened e (neutral vowel) sound: ^u ^u ^ ^i ^y^P^y^P^^^^ — sepsephata, I am sorry ; >M chyet — chet, milk. (3) occasionally, when preceded by xJ oi' ^ > the y is almost dropped, and leaves the long e sound of get in English: tH myet — met, how many; rf Pye—V^, paddy. ^ as in soft, with the regular sound of o in English, varying between the of or and ore : J? y^^ moto, altogether ; /X. J3- sankol, a dale. 14 COEEAN MANUAL. ^^ (1) yo as in yore : ^B- yok, abuse ; ^_ '^yora7i, tumult. (2) when preceded by>^ or >^ 'the ?/ is almost dropped, leaving merely a long sound :>^ --^ syomoun — somoun, rumour; ^^- XX-chyopta — chopta, narrow. .^^oiL as in imcouih, approximating more to the ?t sound in ^9wZZ, than the oo sound in 2^ool : --j^ moun, a door : ^ poul, fire. But at times this sound is distinctly prolonged: Compare -if" noun — noon, snow, with ^ nonn, the eye. ^(1) you asiu youth: J^ ^youmo, nurse; -tT ^ yountal, intercalary month. (2) when preceded by^or j^ , the y is almost dropped, leaving merely a long ou sound: ^ syoid — soul, wine; ^;^ 6 1 cJujo2iin — choiiin, landlord. 6^ (1) cu as in the French pen : >-3L keu, that ; v^ -^ seumoul, twenty. (2) i or y, as in pity: -^ >w m- Jceuvisyepang — kimsyepang, Mr. Kim ; ^^ xX-seuWa — silt'a, I refuse. ^ I i with a sound varying from i short in pin, chin, etc. to i long in ravine : Compare y^ ^ "Cl- 7i-i;Jiato, important, with ^ 'C\- h'dta, lo:]g; ^il ^ ^\-p7hata, I compare, with ^jl P^^j»7to«, s:lk. ^ a as in tajj, with the sound of a distinctly shortened : Compare s r/idl, a horse, with. '^J' mal, speech; nr^ ;^j /.7.ac7if. until, with ^L ^| hachi, a branch. PEONUNCIATION OF DIPHTHONGS. 15 DIPHTHONGS. In order to meet the vocal sounds which their alphabet so far failed to express, the Coreans very aptly availed themselves of certain diphthong combinations and thereby evolved twelve distinct forms and sounds: — ^Ijai 5]oi ^^^ $1 ai 41 oui $fl oai oue ouei 6^1 ei ^1 youi 4] (A] yei S] eui «t)] PBONUNCIATION AND TBANSLITEBATION. Cm ai. In enunciation, these two diphthongs are practically identical, while >^l aj. in sound they range from the open ai in maiii (mane), to the shorter '*) ' vocalization of ai in said (sed); the difference is generally regulated by the accent or emphasis wdth which they are pronounced: Compare C« ^| taisin, minister, with t^j y^j tUsin, on behalf of; /M ^ sairo, newly, with T^l ^ tUro, according to. ^1 ei. This diphthong has the sound of the English e in get, met, etc., but at times is found prolonged, so as to correspond with the ei in eight i Compare j^ 6^1 chycnei, before, with Ai^ seit, three. ^1 yd. In this diphthong we have the y somid prefixed to 6^1 ei, as in yes, yea. ^1 m ^ ^Cl- yeijyihsita, I prepare. ^ oi. (1) As a general rule, in closed syllables this diphthong approximates closely to the English oi in soil : . * ^ >A| C4- moisita,^ I serve. (2) but in open monosyllables it resembles the German modified o: 4^1 sc'i — so, iron ; .^^ 'j/joi— cbo, crime ; ^ poi — po, linen ; "^ XX-l become, may be read either toita or t'ota, but has more often the latter sound. 16 COKEAN MANUAL. ^1 ouL (1) This diphthong, in an open syllable and not preceded by a consonant, is fairly represented both in sound and spelling by the French oui, or English we: ^* rt ^"^^'''^ — weoni, dignit}' ; (2) but when preceded by a consonant, tiie sound of the two vowels -^'yj* and 6j i further coalesces and approximates nearly to tlie German ii: ^1 tout — til, behind; ^ (3) in many words, especially after an initial j), the vowel sound on disappears, leaving only a long i somid as in the English fatigue : ^I poui — pi, a broom ; ^I Wrpouinpang — pin pang, empty room. TfJ youi. This diphthong, which appears only in a few words — all derived from Chinese and all commencing with the aspirated check ^ — has the sound* of oui with y prefixed: but, instead of being clearly pronounced, the y has merely the effect of prolonging the quantity of the original oui: ^1 -5* C|- ch' yoidhdfa — chouihata, I am drunk. eui. This sound is one of considerable difficulty to explain, for, as the two vowels do not distinctly coalesce, it cannot be regarded as a diphthong proper- In open syllables it may be defined as a short u — with the regular sound of ii, not like the English w — joined to the vowel i. But when preceded by a consonant, the tl sound tends to disappear, leaving only the vowel i to be clearly enunciated, with a sound much like that of i in wick : Compare $1 ^ ewmw— iiisim, doubt, with ;pl -^ keuiho — kiho, flag% oa. The value and quantity of the in oa here corresponds with the vowel u, which, when joined to the open a (as in father), produces a sound represented by the English ua in quaff, or wa in waft: I ^ $l'iri oa — iri wa, come here: ^^ hoal — hwal, a bow ; jU. ^^koapou — kwapou, a widow. 4 PEOXU^*ClAiiU-N U-L i^iPHTHONGS. 17 S^ oai. In this diphthong, which rarely occurs in Ooreac words, we have the vowel ^ o and the diphthong 6h ai coalescing, so as to produce the sound of the Enghsh icai in wait, — the o ha^^ng the force of 76 as in the case of the preceding diphthong: oai — wai, Japanese; hoai — hvrai, torch; ^ ^ oaip'oung — waip'oung, typhoon. _^ Guc. The phonetic value of the .S-^ou here is a lo sound vdl'ii a quantity somewhat more prolonged than the it or ic in. the two previous cases, while the (A sound corresponds tathe short v. As a general rule, the i^ronunciation of the English 2f;o in icon may be accepted as giving ., *■,.;,; rendering of the sound of this diphthong: ^A x3\"^'(-'n^-!^'inq — woumanfr. discontent; \L 6 rdji ,,;^,>/. Here we have the vowel -2*0 « and the diphthong 6^1 coalescing so as to produce a sound approaching to the English uc in quell or in icell >^^| kouei, box; ^1 oiici, why?; ;^| ^y hQueipa?ig, slander. 18 COREAN MANUAL. IS0UN8. SYSTEM OF DECLENSION. The chief feature in the declension of Corean nouns is the regtlcir system of agglutination employed to express case relation. The noun-root remains unchanged throughout the declension, or is at most only slightly modified so as to meet the requirements of Corean principles of euphony, viz : ease in enunciation of consonants and harmonic affinity in vowel sounds. Every Corean noun has normally, in addition to the root-form, nine different formal agglutinations expressive of case relation. But it should be observed at the outset that, while these case endings appear regularly in vernacular writing, there is in conversation a constant tendency to dispense with their use, in consequence of their somewhat cumbersome character. This is especially marked in the case of the Nominative, the Genitive and the Accusative, the root-form of the Noun being constantly employed in their stead without any loss in perspicuity of meaning. The terminations for the Instrumental ^ the Locative and Ablative cases are more regularly retained in Corean colloquial; and, though the noun-root may at times be loosely employed in the plr.ce of the Dative, Coreans desiring to be accurately understood are careful to add one of the case-endings or post-positions expressive of this case relation. PABADIGM OF CASE SUFFIXES. 1. Boot Form: may be used in the place of almost any case, remaining unchanged. 2. Nominative: (subject of sentence), i, si, ch'i, ka or hi. 3. Instrumental: by, with, for, through, to, towards, etc., euro, no, sixro, chiiro, TO or heuro. 4. Genitive: of (possessive), eui, sni ov heui. 5. Dative: to, unto, etc., eiiikei, saikei, heuikei, or in the contracted forms kei, kkei, kkeui. 6. Accusative: (object of sentence) euI, seid, clieid, reiil or heul. 7. Vocative : oh ! a or ya. 8. Locative: in, on, at, to, into etc., ei, sai or hei. 9. Ablative: from, since, at, etc., eisye, siiisj/c or hcisije. 10. Oppositivc: as for, with reference to, etc., cun, seun, cJieun, neiui or hciui. DECLEN8I0X OF NOUNS. 19 In the Accusative and Oppositive cases dl, an etc. are frequently- substituted for eul, eun etc. The two vowel sounds a and en appear to be interchangeable in this position, the form of the Corean a — a small dot — being better adapted for speed in writing than eu, which is represented b j* a long horizontal stroke. In pronunciation, however, the sound of a in this position approximates more nearly to the sound of ew than to its strictly proper sound of d short. The eu of the Genitive eui and the Dative euikei is generally dropped when preceded by an open vowel at the end of the noun -root, the i being furthur modified and coalescing with the final vowel of the root, so as to form a distinct diphthong sound. Thus soichyet is regularly used for socui chyet, cow's milk, and the Dative soeuikei is also contracted into soikci, the value of oi in both instances being that of a pure diphthong, in which the o and i coalesce and give a sound indistinguishable from o in German. In the Dative case, the eui of euikei is frequently dropped, leaving only kei as the distinctive Dative ending, and this is generally further modified into kkei or kkeui for euphony. Thus malldvei sirera hanalnim kkeui pilta to horse load to heaven I pray (Load the horse.) (I pray to heaven.) This last form is generally used as an honorific, implying respect on the part of the speaker. ON THE FORM AND USE OF THE CASE SUFFIXES. For words closed by a consonant the Nominative ends in i, which is in some cases aspirated or modified into si or ch'i, so as to bring the case- ending into euplionic accordance with the final consonant of the noun-root. In nouns terminating with an open vowel, however, the Nominative appears in the form of ka, or hi where an aspirate is required. For the Accusative case eul is the distinctive ending, and for the Genitive, eui', but both these forms are subject to the various modifications enumerated in the Paradigm of case suffixes. The nonnal form of the Dative case ending is eidkei. Tliis appears, however, like the post-positions 61. ^| , ^ ^ and "Oi ^ , which arc frequently substituted for it, to be properly restricted to persons and animate objects. It is moreover frequently subject to modifications and contractions, as specified in the Paradigm above given. 20 COEEAN MANUAL. The Ijistnnnental case ends noimally in ro, but assumes the modified iform of no, in accordance with principles of Corean euphony, when the case-ending is immediately precefled by an I at the end of the noun-root. This case, in • addition .to its -striclly Instrumental sense of bv, ivith, etc., very frequently bears a final sense, being used to express purpose for, and dirction through or towards — ideas obviously consequent open or evolv&d from the idea of instrumental- ity. We thus find it constantly used with nouns of place and names of places instead of; the locative ending, e.g. ^ 6 _^ y\ Pi- is equivalent to "^ 6^1 J7f ^l-I go home. There are, however, two proper forms expressive of local case-relation : (1) the Locative agglutination ei, normally used where rest in or on or direction towai'ds As implied; (2) the Ablative agglutination eisye normally used where direction from has to ba expressed. -.But^'at times these two forms appear to be. interchanged, the sye of eisye being regarded as a merely enclitic particle added for the sake of euphony ; and Ahe Ablative form thus sometimes bears a purely locative sense, especially in the case of nouns denoting inanimate objects. The commonest form of the Vocative is that which ends in a; but this case suffix is often dispensed with entirely, its place being frequently filled by one of the exclamatory interjections with which the language abounds. In addition to these case-endings, theCoreans possess a. form pe- culiar to their language, to which has been assigned the name of the Oppos- itive c&se. Ending normally in eun or an, this case has a meaning and use precisely equivalent to the English prepositional phrase as for, .ivith reference to etc. .It occurs constantly in both colloquial and written Corean ; it is sometimes even added to the noun root and used as subject instead of the Nominative case. Its use is always to mark the* contradistinction of two opposing ideas oc propositions, and from this circumstance it has derived its name, of Oppos- itive. It is not restricted to nouns alone, for nearly every part of speech may receive the suffix, where two ideas are contrasted as placed in opposition. Tha suffix has no independent use or meaning as a Corean word, but being chiefly employed with nouns the form has been included among the case endings for convenience of reference and explanation. . Similar case-ending.s are likewise found in the declension of the pro- nouns ; only in the Genitive >...case eui is contracted into i for sake of euphony after the open. vowel sounds of the root forms VW my, andy^j your, appearing for instance, instead of VL ^X and vn ^\ . And a similar contraction also occurs frequently in the Dative case. The pronouns in fvict follow on this point the rule already given for nouns proper, where root form ends in an open vowel. LECLEXSION OF NOUNS. 21 METHODS OF DENOTING NUMBEB, GENDER, dc. The Corean noun possesses no regular inflexion for Number — the suffix teiil, which is occasionally utilized for this purpose, taking all the case termin- ations of a regular noun in the singular. But this teul is not properly an agglutination for the plural; for in Corean, nouns must be rendered either singular or plural according to the context or meaning of the spealver as may be best gathered by the listener. \\Taen teul is affixed to a noun, it is chiefly employed to indicate or express an indefinite number. Thus Jidn sardm oatta, one man came ; tou sardm oatta, two men came ; but sardtn teul oatta, men came, imph'ing an indefinite number. No distinction for Gender exists in Corean as an inflexional form. When sex has to be specially indicated, independent names are employed to designate the object and its sex, or where such names or nouns are wanting in the language, resort is had to the two prefixes am (female) and sout (male) placed immediately before the noun. In Corean there are no Articles properly so-called. The demonstrative pronouns are however employed w^ith a meaning and use, corresponding to the definite article in English ; and the Corean numeralhdn (one) used as an adjective, qualifying and prefixed to the noun, may legitimately be translated a or an for our Enjjlish indefinite article. N.B. — With regard to the following declension tables, it should be observed that, though all the case endings have for the sake of completeness been given with each of the nouns, they are not by any means all equally used thus in every day speech. And in particular it should be noted that the Dative ending in euikei appears strictly to be hardly, if ever, used except with personal nouns. 22 COREAN MANUAL. TABLE OF DECLENSIONS. Nouns may be declined as follows. (1) where the Eo-.;t ends in k, m, w, ng and p : — Boot ^ son hand. Nominative ^«>1 son-i the hand. Instrumental ^A-5. son-euro by the hand. Genitive ^^ son-eui of the hand. Dative ^^>») son-euikei to the hand. Accusative ^1 son-eul the hand. Vocative ^o\ son-a oh ! the hand. Locative ^^1 son-ei in the hand. Ablative ^<^]^ son-3isye from the hand. Oppositive son-eun as for the hand, (2) Where the Root ends in I: — Boot t pal foot. Nominative t^] pari the foot. Instrumental ^^Jt pallo by the foot. Genitive t'A pareui of the foot. Dative t^A pareuikei to the foot. Accusative t-l pareui the foot. Vocative >y.6|. para oh! the foot. Locative t^l parei in the foot. Ablative ^1^1^ pareisye from the foot. Oppositive ^i-$- pareun as for the foot. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 23 (3) When the Eoot ends in t (sometimes in p) by adding si, etc. for certain words, and cA'i etc. for others: — Eoot Nominative Instrumental Genitive Dative Accusative Vocative Locative Ablative Oppositive Eoot Nominative Instrumental Genitive Dative Accusative Vocative Locative Ablative Oppositive 7> >; J. I- 3^ kat kassi kassjiro kassai kassaikei kasseul kata kassai kassaisye kasseun pat patch'i patch' arc patheui patheuikei patheui patch' eul pata pathei patheisye patheun patch 'eun hat. the hat. by the ha^t. of the hat. to the hat. the hat. oh ! the hat. in the hat. from the hat. as for the hat. field, the field, by the field, of the field, to the field. J the field. oh ! the field, in the field, from the field. 1 Sas for the field. J 24 COESAN MANUAL. (4) When the root ends in a vowel, by adding ka etc. for certain words, and hi etc. for others : — Root -fe so bull. Nominative ^ 7\ soka the bull. Instrumental & 3. soro by the bull. Genitive ±^ sosui of the bull. Dative >k$|7i] soeuikei to the bull. Accusative ^■1 soreul the bull. Vocative r soj^a oh! the bull. Locative >L^] soei in the bull. Ablative ^ naraheisye from the kingdom Oppositive ^4^ naraheun as for the kingdom, DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 25 1. 6. 7. Exercise L -s <^n moun yere door open Open the door. -5 ^^ moun tate door shut Shut the door. 1^1 nahi age What elma how much is your age? ch'aik pouineuikei kachye ka book to the lady having taken go Take the book to the lady. yengkoukeisye kat oasso from England just come I have just come from Egland. ^i^ ^3. 4-^ t^_^ saneun nopko kireun hemhao as for hill it is high and as for road it is dangerous The hills are high and the road dangerous. poussaro sseuo by pen write Write with a pen. fit f, ^ ^ pallo palpera by foot tread Stamp with the foot. 26 COEEAN MANUAL. 2. 5. Exercise TI. kapseul price I have given chouetta have given the price. ^]3. 4t5^ 4 pomro by broom Sweep it witt sseurera sweep I a brocm. soeuikei to bullock Load the sirera load bullock. keu nyang paneui pouin that of gentleman wife That gentleman's wife. chipeul chal chiesso. house well has built He has built the house well. onaleun nimkouneui t'anil io as for to-day of the king birthday it is To-day is the king's birthday. chipeisye oatta from house have come. I came from home. «.] 5. 7> 7| 4 pairo kakera by boat go Go by boat. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 27 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. Exercise III. pari mopsi apha foot bad sore My foot is exceedingly sore. tari apha mot kao leg sore not go My leg is sore and I can't go. eumsik massi epso food relish has not I have no appetite. ^^i ^^1 ^^ pamei nounr oatta in night snow has come Snow fell dm.'iug the night. kang moul eresso river water has frozen The river has frozen. kil kaki eryepso road to go is difficult It is difdcult travelling. pika ol tteut hao rain coming intention makes It looks Hke rain. t ^3. 7f ^ Pf mal t'a-ko kakeitta horse ride-and will go I will go on horse back. 28 COEEAN MANUAL. 4. Exercise TV. nari ch'ipta poul ttaiyera day is cold fire kindle The weather is cold ; light a fire. ot elleun nipera clothes quickly dress Dress yourself quickly. pap kachye onera rice having taken come Bring dinner, ^'d t'^ ^^ sonnim hana oasso guest one has come A guest has arrived. ^}% "vl^l ^^ saram manhi onta men many come There are several men coming. pangei teurye nohara in room having entered put Put it into the room. ^ ^ ^ i ^ kyokoun-koun poulle chair-coolies call Send for the chair-coolies. mal anchang chiouera horse saddle saddle Saddle the pony. PRONOUNS. 29 PRONOTJISS. (1) PERSONAL. Root H- na I. Nominative nai naika I. Instrumental "i^ nallo by me. Genitive ^ nai my, mine. Dative vflT^l naikei to me. Accusative ^4 nai nareul ■ me. Oppositive nanan as for me. Root ouri we. Nominative ^^ ouri ■ we. ^^^} ourika J Instrumental -^■e)^ ouriro by us. Genitive ^^ ouri our. Dative -^^^1 ourikei to us. Accusative ^^ ourireul us. Oppositive -T-^ 1^ ourinan as for us. 30 COREAN MANUAL. Eoot ^ Nominative ^] ^]^y Instrumental t^ Genitive ^1 Dative »^i^i Accusative v|4 Oppositive vis: ne neika nello nei neikei nereul nenan thou. thou. by thee. thy, thine. to thee. thee. as for thee. Eoot ^^ neheui you. Nominative neheui neheuika - you. Instrumental y^^3. neheuiro by you. Genitive ^^ neheui your. Dative v^^^l neheuikei to you. Accusative v|^]-| neheuireul you. Oppositive vi^lS neheuinan as for you PEONOUNS. 31 (2) DEMONSTBATIVE. XA chye He, she, it, they, that, (implying distance). ^ keu that 6| i this (impljdng nearness). These demonstrative pronomis are all capable of declension on the usual model. Thus we find — Eoot *•] i this. Nominative '\y\ ika this. Instrumental t^ illo by, or with this Accusative ^!4 ireul this. Oppositive o\^ inan as for this. But with the exception of the nominative, even these cases are but little used ; the root forms being most commonly employed in conjunction with sub- stantives hke Tj for things, or>^W ^ for persons, which bear the inflexions in- stead of the pronouns, the latter (like adjectives) remaining indeclinable in this position, e.g. ^ 411 4vi 4 chye sarameul poulle oa that man having called come Go and call him. (3) POSSESSIVE. Strictly speaking, there are no possessive pronouns in Corean. Their place is taken by the Genitive cases of the personal and demonstrative pronouns, thus, ouri nara Our country. nai atal My son. 32 COREAN MANUAL. (4) INTEBBOGATIVE. T T3 a 61 nou noukou ena etten mousam mouet who ? (oi persons) which ? whft ? (of persons and things) which ? what ? (of persons and things) what ? (of persons and things) what ? (of things) ^ \^ ^ ^ and ^^ ^ ^^^ rarely, if ever, dechned. But -^ or -^ -^ and ^ ^ are capable of regular declension, as follows : — Boot Nominative Instrumental Genitive Dative Accusative Oppositive -Ti- 1 \- >-r \— nou noukou noulca noui nouika nouiro noui nouikei noural noukoural nouinan noukounan who. who. I by whom, of whom, to whom. whom. as to whom. PEONOUNS. 33 Eoot Nominative Instrumental Accusa tive Locative Oppositive ^5! -r a 6^4 mouet mouesi mouello mouesaro mouesal mouesai mouesan what, what. by what. what, in what. as for what. (.5) REFLEXIVE. chakeui che chei cheika chyello seusaro sero pich'a ch'inhi soncho sonsyou himself, herself, itself, oneself. [himself, of himself, itself, of itself, &c.,&c. J {i.e. instinctively, of its own accord). one another, each other (reciprocal). 1 -one self, himself, &c., &c. {i.e. in person). 34 CORE AN MANUAL (6) INDEFINITE. All ^ ta. iS. moto. ^ on (prefix). Any o\y. amo. Any whatever 4i«d>) amotenchi. Each, every n kak. --1 sik. ^1 mai (prefix). -}^ mata (suffix). Many «i^] manhi. Other, another ^t taran. Several <^^ yere. Such *M iren. ^^ chyeren. ^^ keujcen. Whatever 5I^€>1 ettet'enchi. *i-i amman. "Whoever ^i-'d^l noukoutenchi. ^4 mouron (prefix). PEONOUNS. 35 Note 1. — "Each" and ''Every" are frequently expressed by repeating the noun itself without any pronoun prefixed, thus: — ta-tari for tal-tari (monthly), na-nari for nal-nari (daily) &c. Note 2. — In addition to the use o^ tenchi or t'enchi as an enclitic particle to signify ever, the suffix na is frequently eraployed but with a more restrictive sense, meaning "any at least", "although", "no matter what," "any whatever" &c. Note 3. — The indefinite pronouns sovie, any, somebody, anybody, etc., are constantly rendered by the use of the interrogatives v* j-r ^ p) and ^ >4 Thus— T F ' Who will ^o may mean either Who tcill go ? or Someone will go ; which man thus do ma§^ mean either What sort of men act th**^? or tJiere are men who act thv4 ; ^^4 ^ ^^ what about to see work is may mean either What toork is there to be done ? or tJiere is some work to be done. And, in precisely the same way, the interrogativa adverbs ^/^I when'fxA kow m<2ny?and 6^ "C.| tc^(?re? are frequently used with the indefinite sense of sometitnes or by and by, several, and somewhere, respectively. (7) BELATIVE. Relative pronouns as such are unknown in the Corean language, but Relative clauses are rendered by means of Relative Participles, joined as an Adjective to the antecedent Noun — present, past or future, according to the nature of the time required in the Relative clause. 36 COKEAN MANUAL. 8. Exercise V. ourika enchei kakeisso we when will go When will we go ? ^ ^ *1 '^l 7f V >t neheui etai kanaiiya you where go Where ara you going ? nanan ton ep so as for me money have not I have no money. nenan pouchya toiyetta as for you rich have become You have grown rich. ^t ^4 ^^ nareul ch'acha oasso me seek have come Are you looking for me ? ouri chipi katkapso our house near Our house is near. I cheika chal mot hayesso oneself well not have done 6 I beg to apologize. keu iri nom t'assio that work whose fault is Whose fault is this? 1 "cheika" is used for the sake of hicmility and means "I myself." PEONOUNS. 37 3. Exercise VI. noukoureul ch'asso whom seek For whom are you looking ? 2. t ^ ^' ^-S^ han nyang sik chouo one nyang each give Give them a hundred cash each. kak ch'yeei ta isso each in place all are There are some everywhere. ^ °f^ ^5J TJt nal mata mouet hao day each what make "^^at do you do daily? amo pyel il epso any special work is not I do nothing in particular. v>re kachi ta popsyeita :''Vtral kinds all let us see Let us examine the whole lot. nan-natch'i chipe tamera one by one nip fill Take and pack them one by one. illo hangsyang nyemnye toio by this continually anxiety become I am always anxious about this. 10 38 COBEAN MANUAL. 1. 4. Exercise YII. moulken nioto ta sa oasso articles all all buy have come Have you bought the whole of the articles? amotenchi oasye kachye kakera any whatever having come take go Whoever comes let him take it away. etaitenchi naika ttarakanta wherever I follow Wherever you go I will follow. amo any iri-na chosimhao work-ever careful Whatever you do be careful. 6 amo kesi-na tteut tairo sseuo any thing-ever intention according use Use any article you like. -a 41 -i^ T^i 4^1 ^5J-^ keu saram onan kesal ch'inhi poasbo that man coming thing myself saw I myself saw the man coming. *>] ^J-l ^.4 ^^ ^I5i<^ i chipeul naika soncho chiesso this house I personally made I built this house myself. end saram-inchi nailca molla what man may-be I do not know I cannot tell which man it is. PEONOUKS. 39 1. 2. 4. 5. 6- Exercise VIIT. (Belatives) . 6];^] 3.^ 4>tl "l^ ^e^j, ecbei ponaiii p'yenclii illie paryesso yesterday sent letter lost Tlie letter I sent yesierday is lost. chikemu meknaii yaK massi sseita now eating medicine taste bit er The medicine that I am now taking tastes bitter. ouri sa-on ch'dik etai innanya we buy-came book where are Where are the books that we bought ? ouri kireisye mannatten keu eui ouen oasso we on the road met that doctor came The Doctor we met on the road has arrived. na marhan ket ta toiyenna I said thing all have become Have you done what I told you? chye mokoun kachye kal chim moukepta that coolie taken going load is heavy That is a heavy load the coolie is going to take. ouri kenne-kal mouri kipta we across-about-to-go water deep The river we have to cross is deep. 4^1 1 ^ ^ -^ f ^H 'i^ c,[v\ luoknaa niuul oumoureisye nanta we drinking water from well issues The water we drink comes from the well. 40 COEEAN MANUAL PRONOMINAL SUBSTITUTES. Jnstea i of employing the regular personal pronouns, Coreans constantly resort to substitutes of an honorific character, indicative of the speakers' relative rank &c., and mostly derived from Chinese. Among those most commonly used are the following: — ^1 ^1 ^} 5.^ Ol. chyei chyeika chanai tangsin ^^ taik ^ nohyeng ^^ > sisamg saine 4 taikam "J^^, nyengkam "^^ tai-in pi^A* ^ a. Chyei and cJiyeika, when used in the first person or of a third person not pre5':)nt, have a depreciatory or humble sense, but for the second person it is employed familiarly among friends in speaking to one another or in addressing immediate dependants. Chanai is generally restricted to familiar intercourse among friends and relations or is used in addressing aged retainers and inferiors, where one desire^ to be very courteous and considerate. Tangsin is derived from two Chinese words, meaning "representing body". It is an honorific for addressing superiors, — "Sir". Taik is a word of Chinese origin, meaning "house" or "mansion," though its use as a pronominal substitute is a purely Corean idiom. It is used respectfully for"7/ow" among equals in rank, being a less formal term than tangsin and less familiar than chanai. PRONOUNS. 41 Nohyeng, or "elder brother," is a word of Chinese origin in constant use among Coreans, as a substitute for the pronoun "you" in conversation between equals. Syoin, or "small man," is derived from the Chinese, and is employed by the common people, when speaking of themselves before their superiors, or by persons of military rank before civil officers. Sisaing, or "attendant born," is derived from the Chinese, and is used by inferiors in official rank in speaking of themselves to their superiors, and also, for the sake of courtesy and politeness, among equals in rank. Suing, which is derived from the Chinese and means "born," is the form employed by members of the educated classes, who have no official rank» when speaking of themselves before their superiors. Taikam, is derived from two Chinese words and means "Great superin- tendent." It is restricted to High Mmisters of state, and may very accm^ately be translated "excellency. Byeng ham, from two Chinese words meaning "command superintendent" is the correct form for addressing officials of less exalted rank, though it may also be used of very subordinate officers, when the speaker wishes to be very polite. Kong and Tai-in are two terms introduced into Corea from Japan and China respectively, consequent on the opening of the country to foreign trade and intercourse: Ko7ig is strictly a Chinese word of polite signification and may properly be held to correspond with our English "Jlfr.," while as an honorific it has much the same force and use as the Corean term tailc ; Tai-in is derived from the two Chinese words "Great man", and is now constantly used in speaking of, or to foreign officials. N. B. — No attempt will be made on subsequent pages to distinguish by a diacritical mark the tico sounds 6l.and 6 in the transliteration of En Moun- 11 42 COEEAN MANUAL. :^UMi:RALS. CARDINAL. Chinese. COREAN. 1 *a il -f vf. hana 2 '] i toul 3 ^i sam ^ seit 4 >fe sa ^\ neit 5 J. ^± tasat 6 ryouk ^± yesat 7 ^l ch'il t^ nilkop 8 '4 p'al *la yetalp 9 "t kou r d ahop 10 4 sip t yel 11 4t sipil ^■t^ yel hana 12 40] sipi, etc. t^ yel toul, etc. 20 "^4 i sip ^t seumoul 21 *) 4 t i sipil ^t-ti- seumoul hana 22 *| 4 1 i sipi, etc. ^^t seumoul toul, etc 30 ^^>3 sam sip 4^ syerheun 40 -^4 sa sip «f :|. maheun 60 ^4 sip 4 souin 60 ^4 ryouk sip *^)t yeisyoun 70 ^14 ch'il sip ^^ nilheun 80 ^4 p'al sip *^-& yeteun 90 ^4 kou sip 4:^ aheun NUMERALS. 43 100 200 1000 2000 10,000 First Second Third Fourth Firstly Secondly Thirdly Fourthly Fifthly Sixthly Seventhly Eighthly Ninthly Tenthly il paik i paik, etc. il ch'yen i ch'yen, etc il man, etc. > OBDINAL - Chinese Numerals for which there are no pure Corean equivalents. COREAK. chetchai toulchai seitchai neitchai, etc. ■f^^ ORDINAL ADVERBS. hanaheun ^ ,^ '"^ ^^ tourheun seiseun ^1^ V^l ^^ neiheun "W* -^ ,^Sl tasasseun CT -^ ,;^ yesasseun ^ ^ ^ nilkopeun ^ ^ ^yetalpeun 6! J^ J^L ahopeun ^ ,IS1 yeiheun, etc. Chinese. chyei il chyei i chyei sam chyei sa, etc. ilheun inan sameun sanan onan ryoukeun ch'ireun p'areun kounan sipeun, etc. Most of the Corean numerals are thus drawn from Chinese, and before words of Chinese origin such numerals are generally used ; while the Corean numerals proper, which only extend from one to ninety-nine, are conjoined with words of Corean origin or with such Chinese derivatives as are thoroughly assimilated into current colloquial ; thus sei nal, three days, are both purely Corean words but sam il, three days, are Chinese. 44 COKEAN MANUAL. ABBBEVIATEB FOBMS OF NUMEBALS. The first eight Corean numerals constantly occur in abbreviated forms, which are most frequently used in reckoning money, weight, measures, time etc. And these variations, in accordance with the requirements of Corean euphony, depend for their exact form on the initial consonant of the noun which they qualify. Thus we find — ^1 ban tou se sei sek ne nei nek tat tai yet ye nil yet for for for ^"^ 1 for for for for for ^ ^ hana, one. toul, two. seit, three. >*• >«• neit, four. tasat, five. yesat, six. nilkop, seven, yetalp, eight. To give the idea of approximation, conveyed by our English idiom *'two or three," etc., the full or abbreviated forms of the Corean numerals are used in pairs, without any conjunetion; and in this position even the abbrevi- ated forms are sometimes still further shortened. Thus — t ^ han tou tou '} ^1 saram ^1 sei kachi or toue kachi One or two men. Two or three kinds. NUMERALS. 45 sei nei nal tasat ^4 nei >4^ v^ 1^ sene nal chip netet chip keim tait keun keurat pyeng syem ^1 lei tai ye nil yet yesat ^^ nilkop ^ yetalp ahop Three or four days. Four or five houses. Five or six pounds. Six or seven basins. Seven or eight bottles. Eisht or nine bags. FRACTIONS AND MULTIPLES. ^y pan or J^ ^L chyelpan is the Corean equivalent for one half. Other fi'actions are reckoned in the Chinese numerals, conjoined with the Chinese words poun, division, and chi, of, the possessive postposition : — >^ J^ ^1 ^ sam poun chi il, i.e one of three divisions, or ^ ^ ^ >t j v^ sa poun chi sam, i.e. three of four divisions, or | Multiples are rendered by "91 pai,^^ ^ kopchyel or yjt ^ kapchyel, ^^^-^^kop, of which the last is generally used with pure Corean numerals, and the two first more usually with those of Chinese origin. Thus — >y- ^1 sampai or y^ yel kap chyel=ten times. NUMEBATIVES. Just as in English we speak of a Jiock of sheep, a sheet of paper, so many head of cattle, a suit of clothes, etc., so in Corean we find similar terms constantly employed as numeratives, or classifiers, as they have been termed, for different classes of objects. Subjoined is a hst of those numerative terms 12 46 COKEAN MANUAL. which are most commonly in use : — 1. VI 13^ myeng 2Xm 7iom, (impolite) 2. "Oi ^ meri, head a. ^ p'ii 4. ^p'il, bale 5. -^ kouen, volume 6. jMSc%aw^, sheet ■^ ^oi/ew, quire ^ ch'youk, ream 8. ^}j /i;ai 5. X^nat 10. "^i^eZ, suit "^ wow^, bundle XX'tan, sheaf 12. '^ m^ 13. ;;i ^charo handle, 14. J^ ch'yeJc, 15. ^S^chchalc, for one of -for persons. for animals generally. for horses and cattle generally for pack horses, etc, loaded and loads. for cloth, piece goods, etc. for books, rolls of paper, etc. for paper. for boots, stockings, etc. for articles generally, for small articles, grain, etc. for clothes. -for straw, firewood, etc. for hats, mats, bags, money, etc. for pens, fans, etc. for boats, and ships. a pair of articles, e.g. shoes, loads, leaves of a door, etc. NUMERALS. 47 1. 2. 4. Exercise IX. (Numerals and Numeratives) t ^}| ^^ han saram oasso. one man came. One person came. saram hana poasso. man one I saw I saw one man. ton nyep'yennei han chipei sao two women one in house hve Two ladies occupy one dwelling. ^1 -&*) 44 -f-^ 4 ^ "i ^*14 se toni pouchyok hao sek nyang man chouera three ton * insufficient three 7iyang I only give There are thirty cash short : give only three hundred cash. ^ 1 ^'A i ^l ^ 4^^ sek tal houei sei chip ta sakeisso three moon after three house all will buy Wait three months and I will buy all the three houses. ^^ ''I ^ ^ ^i- ^^^ ssal nek syem ne mal namasso rice four pecul four pecks remain There are four pecul and four pecks of rice remaining. namou tat mout kapsi -elmana toio wood 5 bundle price how much become What is the price of five bundles of wood. tai yesat chim man onal sa onera 5 6 load only today buy come Buy some five or six loads only today. * 1 ton, 10 cash. t 1 nyang, 100 cash. 48 COKE AN MANUAL. Exercise X. {Numerals and Numeratives) 1. ie| ^ -^ 4 >g ^ ^ t pori yet mal koa chip yet mout mal mekiesso barley 6 pecks and straw 6 bundles horse fed The horse had 6 pecks of barley and 6 bundles of straw. 2. 6 1 this moulken ye nilkop kachi article 6 7 kinds Bring some 6 or 7 kinds of this article kachye having taken _ft.vi?|. onera come 3. 3.^ mokoun cooUe i. H ea nil 7 ^Vl i^ yetalp saram poulle 8 men called Get some seven or eight coolies. jLi^ef onera come 4. a tz^ r vJ ^^ 45!-^ keu that ^-1 ^ ttai soreul yet ahop mori chapasso time ox 8 9 head slaughtered Some 8 or 9 oxen were slaughtered at that time. 5. ^ JL kounsa soldiers kyokoun-koun chair-bearers ^ Pl| ^ -f^ ^ -r tou niyeng maireul machyetta two names whips met Two soldiers have been flogged. *ia ^ ^-^ yetalp nom poulle eight individual called Get eight chair coolies. J^ v^ ef onera come 7, cheumsaing animals yere mari chapasso several head seized He killed several animals. ^ 1 «1 ^ "J: ^H 4 talk hau meri man chichyera fowl one head only fry Cook one fowl only. NUMERALS. 49 Exercise XI. (Numerals and Numeratives). 1 I ^1 € 4 ^ '^l^ ^1 "fl ^ Jt ^ sf mal sei p'il koa so nei p'il sak-naiye onera horse three {7ium) and ox four (num) hired come Hire three ponies and four bullocks, so tou pari-myen chyokhi sitkeitta ox two loads-ifbe enough will load Two bullocks can easily carry this. yang mok myet p'iri-na* isso cotton goods how many bales- ever are How many bales of piece goods are there? 4. Jl 4) ^ 6^ ^ ^^>fc keu ch'aik tou-e kouen nilkesso that book two-or-three volumes have read I have read a few volumes of that book. 3ifc>a ^^ ^^ ^i=^l t^i '^iJ!. chyosyen chyoheui seumou chyangi han kouen io Corean paper twenty sheet one quire is Twenty sheets of Corean paper make one quire. « >a t ^^ 4 ^^ -T ^^ ^"^^ sin han k'yeri oa pesyen tou k'yeri ponaio shoe one pair and stockings two pairs ^ send. Send a pair of shoes and two pair of stockings. ^ t )t 5: Mi«^ 4^^1 4^ ssal han nat to naiye-parichi mara rice one {mc7n) also throw away ^ avoid Don't throw away even one grain of the rice. pyektol paik kai kapsi elmanya bricks 100 num price how much How much will one hundred bricks cost? *See foot note on page 50, rs 50 COREAN MANUAL. Exercise XII. {Numerals and Numeratives) chyang sokei ot han pel isso press within clothes one suit is There is a suit of clothes inside the press. 2^J t jc 4 ^^ t 5 ^1- -^^^ chip han mout koa namou han mout sa onera straw one bundle and wood one bundle bought come Buy one bundle of straw and one bundle of wood. kat han nip chari ton nip ta it-na * poara hat one (/mw) mat two (nufn) all is-whether see See if you have got one hat and two mats. 4^ S. ^ ^J ^J: pout han charo to sseul ket epso pen one handle even about to use thing not is Not even a single pen is of any use. keu moulken pai han ch'yekei mot ta sitkeitta that article boat one iiium.) not all will load One boat cannot carry all those goods. chim han chchak man chye-ta f touera load one {mim) only carried place Carry only one load there. * Na and ina are euphonic enclitic particles, signifying ever, at least, whether, though, may be, etc. t Ta is merely an enclitic particle placed after chye, the perfect par- ticiple of chita (I carry), for the sake of euphony. It appears constantly in Corean colloquial. With kanta (I go) the participle ka is used but tta (not ta) is added: katta touera, "having gone, place (it)," meaning "go and put (it)." NUMERALS. 51 Exercise XIII. {Fractions arid Multiples). i^ 4 chan 'i syoul pan en an man wine half cup only give Give half a glass of wine only. chouo 1 this ssal rice 4t 4 chyelpan man chi-ko kakera half only carry-and go Carry only half of this rice away. 3, 6] ^] J. «] JL cj. >j- «| vj. ^ c^ 1 this pai ship keu pai pota sampai-na k'euta that ship-in comparison triple-at least large This ship is three times larger than that one. chikeum ^M ^1 3l4J^ now sisyei-nan kapchyel te market price as for double more The market price is now twice as dear. pis-ssao dear ^)^ i^d ^^ "d ^1 7H -^^4 n-en moulken kopchyel man te kachye such article double only more bring Bring double the quantity of these articles. on era come 7. J- ^J 6| ;g ^ C|. ^ -3. 6] Vf ^ ^ T^ keu chnn i chim pota sa kop-i-na moukepta that load this load in comparison quadruple-at least heavy That load is four times as heavy as this one. 4 X3 moureun as for water syoul pota neikapchyereul wine in comparison quadruple Mix four of water with one of wine. "pouera pour 8. J. keu that moulken p'al-ttaiei rika sakop-i-na namasso article in selling-time profit quadruple-ever remained The sale of that article left a profit of 400 per cent. 52 COEEAN MANUAL METHODS OF BECKONING TIME, SEASONS, ETC. The following are the names for the chief divisions of time — Core AN. Chinese. Year 11 hai (i.e. sun) ^ nyen Month 1 tal (i.e. moon) ^l ouel Day ^ nal t il The Coreans borrow their Calendar and their methods of reckoning times and seasons almost wholesale from the Chinese : and for detailed information on these points the studeut is referred to the Grainmaire Coreenn of the French Missionaries. For the computation of years the Coreans lack the convenient system of an era, like the Anno Domini of Christian Nations or the Anno Urbis Con- ditcB of ancient Eome. They use instead the Chinese cycle system, which pro- vides a series of sixty proper year-names used in regular rotation for sixty con- secutive years. When the 60 years are completed the cycle, which is known as the ^> 71 '^youk kap, commences again. Thus the year of the publication of this work (1893) is knov/n as^j ^ , a name which belonged also to the years 1833, 1773, etc. and which will recur again in 1953, 2013 etc. This system obviously lends itself to the creation of the wildest confusion in matters of chrono- logy, historical records, etc. — a confusion for which a remedy has been sought in the addition of the reigning Chinese Emperor's name to the cyclic name of the year. In the computation of the years of a man's age, Coreans use either ,/A syel (familiar and impolite) or/i^j syei (respectful) rather than '51 hai or v^} 7iyen. The year is divided normally into 12 months, of which the first (roughly speaking) coincides with the Western February : and these are distinguished by the Chinese numerals, with the exception of the first and the two last which are known as Chyeng-ouel, Tong chi tal, and Set-tal, respectively. Thus we have — First month ^A -ij Chyeng-ouel. Second month 6| ^ I ouel. Third month >M- ^ Sam ouel. Fourth month, etc. >^ ^\ Sa ouel, etc. METHOD OF RECKONING TIME. 53 Tenth month 4^1 Sip ouel. Eleventh month 4^11 Tong chi tal. Twelfth month 41 Set tal. The purpose of the European Leap-year is served by the insertion every third or fourth year of a leap month, known as^^ ^ i/oim taJ, or^ ^ youn ouel. The months contain either 29 or 30 daijs apiece, and are known as "great" or "small" months accordingly. Both the Chinese and Corean numerals are used in reckoning the days of the month, with the exception of the 15th day and the last day of each month, which are known respectively as ijoram nal and keiimeum nal. Thus we find — Corean. Chinese. 1st day ^ T^ ch'o haro ^*a ch'o il 2ad „ -• A "e ch'o itheul a^! ch'o i 3rd ,, X y- 31 ch'o saheul ^4 cli'o sam 4th ,, _^ ^ft cli'o naheul -S.^ ch'o sa 5th „ J. ^^1 ch'o tassai ^J- ch'o KJ..LX ,, ^_ ^^1 ch'o yessai ^# ch'o ryouk 7th „ =i m ch'o nilhei al ch'o chil 8th „ ^ •H^.^) ch'o yeteurai a^ ch'o p'al 9th „ ^ 6|. J^ Hj ch'o aheurai a-t ch'o kou 10th „ J. tt ch'o yerheul ^4 ch'o sip 11th „ 't -f ^ yel haro 4t sip il 12th ,, etc t 5!^ yel itheul, etc >J^| sip, i etc. loth ,, JL S^ poram nal 4^ sip 16th ,, etc t ^^1 yel yessai, etc. ^i^ sip ryouk, etc Last „ 1/1 J3L 4^ keumeum nal ^'i hoi il. 54 COKEAN MANUAL. The word clVo nsecT with the first ten numerals in the above table is deriveu from the OhineoO aid signifies the "first decade" of the month. Haro, itheul, etc. may also be iisecT Vvithout this prefix to indicate the first ten days of the month ; but more generally, when thus standing alone, these words express a period of time, — of one day, two days etc. And in this latter case they may- appear either with the locative case-ending ei, or joined as adjectives to the word tsL ^1 , 7nanei, a period. In the same way porajn, when used apart from nal, generally means a period of 14 or 15 days, or, as we should say, a fortnight. Appended is a list of some of the words most frequently used in the computation of times, seasons etc. which have not yet been noticed. COREAN. Chinese. Today -S.1 onal ^'l keum il >> ^% tang il Tomorrow %] % nai il >> ^''l myeng il Day after tomorrow 3.^ morel Two days after) tomorrow J ^^ keulp'i • Three days after ) tomorrow j a^3| keukeulp'i Any future day ^% hou il Yesterday H^l echei ^1*1 chak il >> H^^^ echekkeui Day before yesterday j^. >t| yj\ keuchekkeui ^pi*a chaichak il This year *HI i hai keum nyen tang iiyen Next year -s-s:^) onan hai nai nyen myeng nyen Any future year hou nyen nai hou nyen METHOD OF KECKONING TIME. r,n Last year 7.HI Year before last JX ^ ^ kan hai „^ v^ cbyen nyen >y- \A chak nyen ^ ^ syang nyen 7J Vg^ke nyen keuretkeui^j >^ v^ chaichak nyen This month *1t i tal -^ -^ keum ouel Next month J.)Lt onan tal Hi -^ nai ouel Last month ^It kan tal ^j -g ke ouel New Year's Day New Year Tide >^>| -gj New Year, 1st ten days Every day, day \ 1^ ol pL sai hai by day vf v^ Every other day '^ ^^ ^ All day -^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ch'o haro >"! jt;^ .il sin kou syei (new old •jiT'^l year) "5l./^( hoan syei (change year) /Ml >^| syei si (year season) j^ J^ chyeng ch'o nal mata ^ ^ il i^ nanari v^ ^ nyen il ^ ^ ch'youk il ^] ^ mai il \^ haro kenne^l" ^ kan il ^ ^ chyong il All night ^ 61: chyong ya Spring 4 pom -^ ch'j^oun Summer . ^t nyeram "SLha Autumn y}^ kaeul ^ch'you AVinter Til kyeoul J^ tong All the year round 5L ^1 3J, X^ ch'youn ha ^ ^f Tf ^ch'you tong 56 COKE AN MANUAL. Exercise XIV. cli'o haro nal oasso kireisye itheul memeuresso first day came on road two days waited He arrived on the 1st having stopped two days on the road. yekeuisye luyetcb'irei kasso naheurei kasso here from how many days in f::one four days in gone How long have you taken to go ? Four days. 3. 4. a,ina tai yessai manei* toraokeisso perhaps five six period will come back I shall return perhaps in some 5 or G days. poram houei oasso poram nal poasso fortnight after came fifteenth day saw He came after a fortnight and I saw }jim on the 15th. kyeourei ch'ipko nyeramei tepta winter-in cold-and summer-in is hot It is cold in winter and hot in summer. 4*^1 ^JajI yl-k^] 7]-f4 pomei simeuko kaeurei ketv)unta spring-in sow and autumn-in reap You sow in spring and reap in autumn. H| 7). <^:t] cj. ^ ^1 ^ 3.^-k naika yekeui tasat hai memeuresso I here five years have stayed I have lived here five years. . H i ^*1 t^ i-^ 7f4 toue nal houei han pen kou kyeng kacha two-three days after one time sight seeing let us go Let us go for a picnic in a few days. * This would he equally well expressed by the use of 5l ^ ^t a participial form of^ 'C\-to accomplish. Thus, aw « tai yessai toiyeya torao- keisso. METHOD OF RECKONING TIME 57 Exercise XY. 1 ^^ 7H ^Pl ^^Jl^ ^ onal kasye nai-il tora onera to day ha\'ing gone to morrow come back Go to day and come back to morrow. keu ch'aik echyekkeui poasso that book yesterday saw I read that book yesterday. 3. ^^1 v} ^ oj. 6| -^A] J. or 3} M] ^ i-4 >t hoan-syeina p'yen ani hasio koa-syei c'ual hasyesso exchange-year may-be weU make past-year well have made? A Happy New Year to you! sin-kou-syeiei keuiouni ettesio new-old-year-in strength how is May all health and happiness be yours! nohyengfcui erousinnei nyensyei myetch'isio elder brother's father year-year how much is? How old is your father? ^ 4 J. ^]_ 5|4^ ryouk sip o sj'ei toisyesso sixty five years has accomplished He is sixty five years of age. keu aheui myet syel * inya yetalp syel mekesso that boy how-many cakes is? eight cakes has eaten How old is that boy? He is eight years old. i tari k'eunya chyekeunya this month is great? is small? Are there 29 or 30 days in this month ? 5. >9 is the name of a special form of cake eaten on New Year's Day. It has passed into a famiHar formula for reckoning the age of inferiors or equals. 15 58 COKEAN MANUAL. ADJECTIYES. Adjectives are of two kinds : — (i) Words that undergo no inflexion or modification. These are either primarily nouns used adjectivally to qualify another noun, or true adjectives derived from the Chinese. Thus — 4^a soi keurat An iron bason. *1- syang mal Common speech. (2) Words in which verb and adjective are combined and which are conjugated exactly like ordinary verbs' — in fact which are true verbs. Thus chyot'a means "I am good, thou art good, etc" for all persons, singular and plural. The participial forms, however, supply the true adjective, and as such always precede the nouns they qualify, whereas the predicate forms follow the subject and close the phrase or sentence, as in the case of the verb. Thus — chyoheun saram A good man. sarami chyot'a The man is good. Adjectives of this second class are capable of assuming all the modi- fications, expressive of tense, mood, etc., proper to a regularly conjugated verb. And of these some of the most important will be found in the appended tables of conjugation : while other modifications, such as the conditional in myen, the causal in nikka, etc., which are in constant use may be readily formed on the model of the ordinary verb. The two participles — known as the "verbal" and "adjective" participles — are the ruling forms of the adjectival conjugation : and of these, as it is difficult to give any rule of anything like universal application for their formation, a selection of specimens is here given — Present. 44 Verbal Participle. Adjective Participle. kilta 7]^ chareuta ,^r VL nelpta ^ (A chopta ,^. 6l* kire p^ challa ^L J^- kin (long) chareun (short) nelpe ^ J^ nelpeun (broad) chopa ,;^ ,^ chopeun (narrow) ADJECTIVES. 59 Present. Verbal Participle. Adjective Participle. ^^^ kipta ^J^ kiphe y^t kipbeim (deep) ^^n chyekta ^H chyeke ^U chyekeun (small) ^^ neullcta ^H neulke ^-gr neulkeun (old) 4^ ch'ata 4 ch'a 4 ch'an (cold) ^^ tepta t]4j teoue ^1-S: teoun (hot) ^^ natta v4 nacha Vl nachan (low) To the verbal participle we constantly find the enclitic particle sye added in Corean colloquial — mainly for purposes of euphony. The sense- of the simple participle remains practically unaltered, but there appears to be a certain force in this enclitic corresponding to some extent with the English conjunctions, since, as, etc. And when followed by the Postposition JsL ^n pout'e, from, the Verbal Participle with the euphonic suffix sye is employed idiomatically to denote the period from which a certain event or course of events dates — when we in English should use a noun. In common with ordinary verbs, these conjugated adjectives possess, in addition to the regular adjective participle ending in n (e.g. ch'yoheun, k'eun, etc.), a future adjective participle, which is formed by changing this final n into I (e.g. ch'yoheul, k'eul, etc.) This form is generally, though not invariably, used where a comparative sense is required, and then gives a meaning corresponding to the Enghsh idiom "could there be" (if interrogative), or (if affirmative) "there could not be". 60 COEEAN MANUAL. CONJUGATION OF ADJECTIVES. Present :£4 chyot'a I am good, thou art good, „ (polite) s>fe chyoso he is good, we are good, etc. Pa3t j&f ^ chyohatta I was good etc. Future S^l^ chyok'eitta I shall be good etc. Interrogative ^^ ^ chyobeunya „ (polite) ^a: ff chyoso ■am I good etc. Participle verbal Je4 chyoha good „ adjective s.t chyobeun good „ adverb cbyohi chyok'ei j ■good, well Substantive chyok'i chyobeum -goodness Present „ (polit«) k'euta k'euo [ am great, etc. Past H^ k'etta I was great, etc. Future 3Lf>l -^ k'eukeitta I shall be great, etc. Interrogative „ (polite) 3L^ k'eunya k'euo .am I great, etc. Participle verbal ^ k'e great „ adjective ^ k'eun great „ adverb ^»] k'eukei | ^eatly Substantive ^7j k'euki { greatness ADJEC TIYEQ. 61 ^^ nopta >I amhigb, etc. ...., ^^ nopso ) Past ^IW nopbatta I was bigh, etc. Future ^el'^ nopkeitta I sball be higb, etc. Interrogative ^si^ nopheunya 'am I high, etc. „ (polite) ^^ nopso Participle verbal ^4 nopha high ,, adjective ^^ nopbeun high „ adverb ^^1 nophi [high )) j> ^^1 nopkei ) Substantive ^7] nopki height Present ^^^ nerata ■ I am broad, etc. „ (polite) ^ %^ nerao , Past ii^ nelletta I was broad, etc. Future vjeTgof nerakeitta I shall be broad, etc. Interrogative V|S V|: neranya ^am I broad, etc. ,, (polite) ^ 2-S. nerao . Participle verbal i^ nelle broad ,, adjective v| t neran broad ,, adverb ^ ^^) nerakei broadly Substantive •171 nelki (breadth (but generally neljiki from nelpta) 16 G2 COEEAN MANUAL. Present „ (polite) cb'ipta ch'ipso -I am cold, etc. Past Future cb'iouetta ch'ipkeitta I was cold, etc. I shall be cold, etc. Interrogative „ (polite) ch'iounya ch'ipso •am I cold, etc. Participle verbal -1^ ch'ioue cold ,, adjective ^1^ ch'ioun cold ,, adverb ^J^] ch'ipkei coldly Substantive -J 71 ch'ipki ch'ioum V coldness Present „ (polite) :a44 chyoch'ant'a chyoch'anso J am bad, etc. j Past :s41K chyoch'anhatta I was bad, etc. Future ja^^'^- chyoch'ank'eitta I shall be bad etc. Interrogative „ (polite) chyoch'anheunya chyoch'anso ■am I bad etc. Participle verbal ic^^f chyoch'anha bad ,, adjective 5:4^ chyoch'anheun bad ,, adverb Substantive s4^1 chyoch'ank'ei chyoch'anhi chyoch'ank'i ^ badly badness ADJECTIVES. 63 Present „ (polite) Past Future Interrogative „ (polite) Part, verbal ,, adjective ,, adverb ) > >> Substantive 2L ^7] aramtapta aramtapso )-I am lovely, etc. aramtaoatta I was lovely, etc. aramtapkeitta I shall be lovely, etc. aramtaounya | tit i. •' ^am I lovely, etc ^l-l'^-^ aramtapso aramtaoa aramtaon aramtapki aramtai aramtapki aramtaom J lovely lovely V lovely loveliness Present ^ ^ ^^^ „ (polite) >^ ij 4: ^ ^ sarangseurepta sarangseurepso 1 am amiable, etc. Past ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ Future >^ ^ 4- ^ ^ Interrogative ^ i2}- >^ "^ J5- „ (polite) >^ ^ >ii ^ J: Part, verbal >t ^ ^ ^ 4] „ adjective^ ^^ ^ -^ „ adverb >^ ^ ^ ^ ^| Substantive >t ^ ^ ^ 7] I „ , >t f ^ ^ -I- ^ sarangseureouetta I was amiable, etc. rt sarangseurepkeitta I shall be amiable. V^ sarangseureounya 1 ^ j amiable, etc. sarangseurepso J sarangseureoue sarangseureon amiable amiable sarangseurei Umiably sarangseurepkei J sarangseurepki I. ^^^i^^nity sarangseureom 64 COEEAN MANUAL. 2. 8. Exercise XYI. 7a ^y-h 317^ 7lx^ kin nokkeun nokkeun kilta A long string. The string is long. ^14 v^oi y]z] ^1 ^^^^ nelp'an nenie kire chal mos-sseukeitta board too long well not-will use The board is too long and won't do. chareuQ ch'amtai ch'anita,i chareuta A short bamboo. The bamboo is short. totchari challa mot kkalkeitta mat short not will spread The mat is too short to cover (the floor). nelpeun pat patch'i nelpta A broad field. The field is broad. kiri nelpe tanniki ciiyot'a road broad travelling is good The road is broad and good for walking. chopeun pa^ig pangi chopta A narrow room. The room is narrow. ^,| ^o\5l 4 °1^| >3?£t>|. pai chopato chim manhi sitnanta boat narrow though load many load The boat though narrow can carry a large load. ADJECTIVES. 65 3. 4. 5. Exercise XYII. kipheun moul Deep water. ^ ^1 7J t^ mouri kipta The water is deep. kaug mouri kiphe pai dial kakeitta river water deep boat well will go The river is deep and the boat can easily go. neulkeun kyeichip An old woman. kyeichipi neulkta The woman is old. keu sarami neulke that man old hangsyang alnanta always sick That man is old and always ailing, kipheumyen haingsyenhaki souipta mouri water if deep navigation is easy If the water be deep the navigation is easy. nari day ch'ioumyen chyangchak kapsi pis-ssata if cold firewood price is dear If the weather be cold firewood is dear. ^ ^^ ^^t I*) nyerami neme teoumyen summer too if hot If the summer be too hot sickness will be prevalent. ,^6| pyengi sickness °I4 mant'a is many keu namou chyekeumyen taran ket patkoa onera that wood if small other thing changed come If that wood be too small exchange it for another piece. 17 66 COEEAN MANUAL. 2. Exercise XYIII. ^6| t^^^^ 7f7] ^n^ nari teoue-sye kaki eryepta day hot going is difficult travelling is difficult in this warm weather. keu moul kiphe-sye chal mot kenne ka that water deep well not across go The water is too deep for crossing. keu saram erye-sye-pout'e kongpou hayesso that man young-from work has made He has been a student from his earliest years. keu neulkeun-i * chyelme-sye-pout'e pyeng teuresso that aged young-from sickness entered That old man has been ailing from his youth. nal teoue-sye-pout'e momi chom natta day hot-(euph) from body little is convalescent I am in better health since the warm weather. echei etoue-sye-pout'e pi sichakhayesso yesterday dark-from rain began It began to rain at dusk yesterday. te chyoheul pepi innanya te chyoheul pepi epso more good (future) law is ? more good (future) law is not Could there be a better law? There could not be a better law. ^ ^ ^J^l ^vt t:^ vj.^ ^ te k'eul chipi epso pyello naheul ket epso more high (future) house is not specially superior (future) thing is not There could not be a bigger house. There could be nothing better. 6. * The i converts the adjective participle into a noun, being in fact the nominative case inflexion. ADJECTR^S. 67 COMPABISON OF ADJECTIVES. The Comparative degree is rendered by — (1) ^ ^r°^ jL ^poi(i or potem, than, placed as a suffix directly after the object with which comparison is made. These suffixes are some- times used in conjunction with the particles te and tel. (-•) "Ol ^c, niore, or ^ tcl less, which are placed immediately preceding the adjective. In negative sentences constructed with these particles, the object v/itli which comparison is made generally appears in the ablative case (ending in eisye) , — more however for the sake of euphony than from any requirements of Corean syntax. (3) t^ _5uor ^ ,5^toroli or t'orok, more, joined as a suffix to the stem of the verb, which is formed by dropping the final ta of the present tense. Where the present tense has the aspirated termination t'a, t'orok is used. It should be noted that these suffixes are also used as post-posi- tions with the sense of iintiL (4) ^ S^sarol:, more, is used as a suffix in conjunction with the future participle (ending in I) of both verbs and adjectives, and is not unfrequently followed by the comparative particle te or teok. The Sitperljtive degree is rendered by prefixing to the adjective adverbs of inteusity such as the following — HJ .^??iaiou, very; Oi. ^achou, entirely; jO. ^1 koahi, excessively; ^ ^kachang, greatly; neme and paiticularly and most emphatically by the use of the Chinese ordinal numeral t^l ^\ chyei il, first. 68 COEEAN MANUAL. 2. 3. 4. Exercise XIX. 6] >i a >^}^^ ^^ i san keu san pota nopta this hill that hill than is high This hill is higher than that. *] 4) JX 4)JL^ ^^ i ch'aik keu ch'aik potem natta this book that book than is superior This book is better than that keu kyeichipi te myohata that woman more is beautiful That woman is prettier. keu mar-eun tel saonapta that horse-as-for less is fierce That horse is not so vicious. i moureun syeoul moul potem te chyot'a this water-as-for Syeoul water than more is good This is better than the water in Seoul. 6. i syouri keu syour-eisye te chyoheun ket epta this wine that wine-from more good thing is not This wine is no better than the other. 6) ^J; a t^H ^ ^^ ^ ^ "^^ i k'al keu k'ar-eisye te chal teul ket epta this knife that knife-from more sharp thing is not This knife is no sharper than the other. i kiri chye kil potem te katkaon kirinya this road that road than more near road is ? Is this road shorter than that one? ADJECTIVES. 69 1. 0. 6. Exercise XX. man-t'orok chyot'a manheul-sarok chyot'a many-more is good many-more is good The more the better. kapsi nouk-torok mitchinta noukeul-sarok mitcbinta price cheap-more lose money cheap-more lose money The cheaper the price the more I lose. kil kal-sarok te hemhata road going-more more is precipitous The more (we) go, the worse the road. chaimoul mohol-sarok t'amhata money collecting-more covet The more he gets, the more he wants. po-torok sarangsenrepta see-more is lovable The more I see him, the more I love him. chou-torok tallftnta choul-sarok tallanta give-more he demands gi\'ing-more he demands The more I give the more he wants. neulk-torok ken pereussi itta aged-mitil that habit is He maintains that habit all his life. 4IJ.4 t 1*1 ch'youi-t'orok syoul meke dmnk-until wine drinks He drinks until he is drunk. 18 70 COREAN MANUAL. 2. 1 this 6. 7. a Exercise XXI. 1 this keu that eumsik-eun f food-as-for This food 3-^] ^]-^ :£4 13 >; massi taste has the best 6 maiou very flavour. chyot'a is good ^^ chip jekeni-sye ch'yaksiri melta house here-from truly is far That house is a good distance from here. 6^ ;«) 7> c4] % echei-ka chyei-il ch'ioun yesterday first cold Yesterday was the coldest day. ^]^ t *l Ji. nari-o daj'-is 4^1 ^^ ^<&^y} koahi k'e-sye mos-sseukeitta exceedingly big not will use it won't do if it is too big. tarn te nopk'ei ssamyen ton manhi mekkeitnanya wall more highly if build money much will eat? If I build this wall higher will it cost much? ton money haika sun ^ ^51 T^V^ 4^1 ot^l «]^)oJ.J: koahi manhi mek-chianso excessively much eat-not It will not cost so very much. chi torok mouet hayetnanya set until what have done ? What have you been doing all day ? chyongil kongpou * hayesso all day labour have made I have been studying all day. f etm, the oppositive case ending has a restrictive force and indicates one kind of food out of many supposed to be present before the eyes of the speaker, * Jcong pou is a word derived from the Chinese, meaning labour generally: but in Corean the meaning has become restricted to study, as being the only kind of labour to which a native gentleman would condescend to devote himself. VEKBS. 71 YEBBS. The most characteristic feature of the Corean language is the complex mass of inflection and agghitination whereby the verb is modified to express time, mood, condition, co-ordination and subordina,tion, interrogation, official rank, etc. — in short almost every var^nng shade of thought or action. Elnow- ledge of the verb — and in this has to be included the adjective, which in Corean combines (as we have seen) the adjective proper with the verb "to be" — implies a thorough acquaintance with all the intricacies of the Corean language both in etjTnologj' and s}Titax. Even the ordinary Conjunction constitutes part of the verb inflexion, modifying and appended as a suffix to the different tenses. Many of these socalled Conjunctions are used merely as marks to indicate the breaks or divisions in the sentence — a function fulfilled in English by our system of pimctuation. Their correct employment presents one chief difficulty of the Corean language and involves a close study of the colloquial, especially as these "punctuation conjunctions" are frequently meaningless in themselves and are only inserted for euphony as connecimg hnks between the different parts of a sentence. Verb modifications may be divided into two categories : — (1) Simple inflexions — i.e. agglutinations v/hose original meanings as such have early disappeared and which are now found only incorporated into and forming part of, the verb itself, as aids to the expression of differences of tense, mood, etc. ; (2) Agglutinations properly socalled, i.e. words expressing independent ideas and added as suffixes to the verb stem while retaining their original meaning, to supply deficiencies in the Corean vocabulary. In the present, past, and future tenses the inflexions are regular and simple. An equal regularity marks the participial formations so much used in Corean colloquial. The verbal participle is always foimd ending in a or c in accordance with the requirements of euphony ; and the law is that with the two long and strong vowels a and o in the stem, the strong a closes the parti- ciple ; while with other vowels and diphthongs and also with a short o in the stem, the weak vowel e marks the participle ending. This verbal participle is an ever recurring form of the verb inflexion, ha\-ing in addition to its orioinal signification and use as a participle, the Vvddest possible range both in meaning' and in application. It appears as an imperative, is fi-equently substituted for the present, past and other tenses ; and can as a general rule supply every requirement of Corean colloquial, being at all times and in all connexions clear and easily understood. 72 COEEAN MANUAL. All division of the Corean verb into tense, mood, participle or voiee is purely arbitrary and conventional. On the part of native scholars and students no attempt has ever been made to reduce their vernacular to any grammatical system or to formulate any vocabulary of the language beyond the Ok P'yen — a coinpilation intended to facilitate the correct pronunciation, and to expound the meanings, of the Chinese characters. Grouping the verbal terminations for inflexion and agglutination under their allied and cognate forms, four diifsrent conjugations may be evolved : — • (1) A series of endings in ta, which may be legitimately termed the "ordinary" conjugation, presenting as it does the primary form from which the principal modifications may be constructed. In colloquial use this conjuga- tion is employed in addressing inferiors in rank, or informally in current con- versation amongst equals. (2) A series of endings in nya which constitute the interrogative form corresponding with the "ordinary" conjugation. (3) A series of endings in o and so which Coreans employ when they address equals or superiors and which may be designated the "polite" conjugation. (4) A series of agglutinations added to the verb stem of the various tense inflexions to express condition, time, manner, co-ordination, subordination, etc. i.e. agglutinations which have very often the force and use of mere con- junctions. This may be aptly termed the "conjunction conjugation". And it is this conj ugation in particular the acquisition of which will require the serious attention of the student of the language. The present tense of the "ordinary" conjugation shows two forms ; — (1) The ending in ta (or t'a where the verbaJ participle is aspirated) ; (2) The ending in nta. This latter ia the correct inflexion with a noun or pronoun as subject to the verb, either expressed or understood. On the other hand ta (or fa) is employed in a general sense irrespective of any definite subject and much in the same way as we resort to the infinitive ("to make" etc.) where we wish to refer to the verb generally. In short ta (or t'a) implies general, while nta implies specific predication of the verb's action. But under the Corean verb there falls to be included the part of speech known in English as the adjective, and with these "adjective verbs," as they may very properly be designated, the use of ta and nta is reversed. Thus ta is the regular inflexion for predication in the present tense while the form nto, which is found only in certain words, produces a new sense and meaning. For instance in the phrase "7ial palkta" we have the signification "the day is clear," but in "nal palknanta, "the day is clearing up". CONJUGATION OF VEEBS, 73 The past tense is formed by adding tia to the verbal participle; while the future is made by substituting keitta {Jc'eitta in the case of aspirated stems) for ta of the first form of the present tense. This becomes Jckeitta in the few verbg where this present tense end in tta. Inflected to express time, mood, condition and endless shades of meaning as regards action, the Corean verb possesses no distinction for person or number and one form stands for the singular and plural including all persons, first, second and third. Coreans as a rule avoid having recourse to pronouns, and the person and number must consequently be inferred from the context especially in the colloquial. CONJUGATION OF VERBS, Section l.—OBDINABY CONJUGATION. 'S ^\ hata, I make (I speak). Indicative Present t> >> Past „ Future Imperative Belative Participle Present il make, thou makest, he makes, we make, etc. ^ X "^^^y^^^^ I made, etc. "^ TJj PJL hakeitta I shall make, etc. ^ ^ ^hayera make. t4 hacha let us make. ^ % ^ ^ ^ hanan m*king. ban made. h&l about to make, haten made. Past ,, Future ,, Imperfect -^ C^ „ Perfect 'S' ^ ^1 ^ayetten made. Verbal Participle -g^ e)^ "" haye \ ^ ti M hayesye fbaving made. * haija is c(,n irregular form occasionally heard in Coreaia colloquial. 19 14: COKEAIn [ MANU^ lL. yy Cl kata, I go. Indicative Present y}^ kata ■ I go, thou goest, etc. »> »> ^'i^ kanta „ Past yJt^ katta I went, etc. „ Future 7I7JI Clkakeitta I shall go, etc. Imperative 7> ka • go. )) y\ i] ?|-kakera >> 7)-4 kacha let us go. Eel. Part. Present yy's. kanan going. „ Past ^i kan gone. „ Future t kal about to go. ,, Imperfect 7f^ katen gone. ,, Perfect ^'i katten gone. Verbal Participle :^> ka . having gone. •» >> 7H kasye ^ Cl Ota, I come. Indicative Present ±t\ ota ' I come, thou comest, etc. »i »» ^^ onta Past ^^ oatta 'J. came, etc. „ Future i^ ^ 'Clokeitta I shall come etc. Imperative 4 oa 'Come. ft J, ^ jl^onera it ^4 ocha let us come. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 75 Rel. Part. Present ^ ^ „ Past J^ „ Future •§• „ Imperfect JJL p) ., Perfect ^ t^ Verbal Participle $, , onan coming. on come. ol about to «ome. oten come. oatten come. > having come, oasye j 6| 'Cl itta, I am, I Indicative Present Past ,, Future Imperative have. Bel. Part. Present „ Past „ Future „ Imperfect „ Perfect Verbal Participle *I4 itta I am or have, thou art or hast, etc. 6| >M Cl- issetta I was, or had, etc. 6^ 7?| Cl itkeitta I shall be, or shall have, etc, be, or have. r ^1 ^issera 6 5!4 5!4 itcha innan issan issal 6| ^ itten ^ epsan not had or been. ,, Future ,, Imperfect 6* >^ epsal 61 xA epten about not to have or be. not had or been. ,, Perfect Verbal Participle 6* >A"i ^ epsetten ^ ><-! epse ) 6j /A /^ epsesye not had or been. not having been or not ha\nng had. ^ pL pota, I see. Indicative Present Past „ Future ^ tl pota ) \jf ^ Clpokeitta I see etc. I saw etc. I shall see etc Imperative see. let us see. CONJUGATION OF \T^RBS. 77 Eel. Part. Present ^ ^ ponan seeing. Past ^ pon seen. „ Puture 4 p°' about to see. „ Imperfect 3- ^ poteu seen. „ Perfect >j. 6^ pi poatten seen. Verbal Participle i 6V>^ poasye ] having seen. >^ Ci* sseuta, I use, or I write. Indicative Present Past „ Future Imperative Eel. Part. Present ^«^ Jr „ Past <^ Future <^ Imperfect ^«^ p| Perfect >^ p| Verbal Participle ■^"j >^ Pi. sseuta ti^ Cl- sseunta '^^.'f "Cl ssetta >«^ 7^1 "W- sseukeitta ^H ^1. seera sseucha sseunan sseun sseul sseuten ssetten sse ssesye j I use or write, etc. I used or wrote, etc. I shall use or write, etc. use, or write, let us use or write, using or writing. used or written, about to use or write, used or written, used or written. having used or written, 20 78 COKEAN MANUAIi. Jcl ^ ch'ita, I strike. Indicative Present >14 cli'ita - I strike, etc. >> >> >d^ ch'inta - „ Past ^'^ ch'yetta y I struck, etc. J, Future 3^1 ;?0 Clch'ikeitta I shall strike, etc. Imperative ^^ ch'yera strike. »> ^14 ch'ioha let us strike. Rel. Part. Present ^]^ ch'inan striking. „ Paat -1 ch'in struck. „ Future 4 ch'il about to strike. „ Imperfeet ^1 C^ ch'iten struck. ,, Perfect ^^ ch'yetton struck. Terbal Participle -^ ch'ye ' having struck. t* ^^ ch'yesye yk XX. chouta, I give. Indicative Present ^ t^ chouta. I j ^-^^^ ^^^ ^X\ chounta) P t ^ ^ 'Clchouetta I gave, etc. Future ^ ^ r^choukeitta I shall give, etc. Imperative ^ ^ ^.houera give. ^4 choucha let us give. CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. Eel. Part. Present ^ JT ciaoiinan giving. Past ^ choun given. „ Future -^ choul about to give. „ Imperfect ^. C^ chouten given. Perfect ^ ^ t ^ chouetten given. Verbal Participle ,^ 6-J choue ' having given. ^ 64 yj chouesye nj 4 mekta, I eat. Indicative Present ^ Pi- mekta „ „ tsj ^ X;|.meknanta ^, Past tJj 64 -ctmeketta „ Future Vi J^ CLmekkeitta Imperative «j 6^Sf mekora 1 4 Eel. Part. Present Past „ Future „ Imperfect X^j p| Perfect Vl ^ t^ meketten Verbal Participle Vi 6l meke mekesye P? n ^ ^^4 ^^4 mekcha meknan raekeun mekeul mekten ^6^/^ I eat, etc. I ate, etc. I shall eat, etc. eat. let us eat. eating. eaten. about to eat. eaten. eaten. having eaten. 08 COEEAN MANUAL. yX pL chapta, I catch. Indicative Present >^ ' Cj. cliapta j " ' II catch, etc. Past Future ^' }T X\ chamnanta j ■^ ' jt ^r chapatta ^ • 7j| ^ chapkeitta V* ^r iM-chapara chapcha Imperative Eel. Part. Present >^ JT „ Past 4 4 „ Future ;^ ^ .,, Imperfect >^ Pl ,, Perfect ^^ 6|. p| chapatten Verbal Participle >^ 61. chapa charanan chapeun chapeul chapten I caught, etc. I shall catch, etc. catch. let us catch. catching. caught. about to catch. caught. caught. having caught. '-§• "Cl- oulta, I WBex) er cry. lufdicative Present j> >> Past ,, Future -^ "Ci. oulta w- "Ci- ounta ,S- t^ "Ci. ouretta -$• tA "Cl oulkeitta - I weep or cry, etc. I wept or cried, etc. I shall weep or cry, etc Imperative >> ^^ 1/ ^om-era -$• ^L oulcha weep or cry. let us weep or cry. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 81 Bel. Part. Present Past „ Future ,, Imperfect „ Perfect Verbal Participle ^^ xX' nott'a, I release. Indicative Present Past Future Imperative Bel. Part, Present Past „ Future ,, Imperfect „ Perfect Verbal Participle ^^ ounan weeping. ^ oun wept. ^ oul about to weep "k^ oulten wept. ^t^ ouretten wept. ^'A ^^^ oure ouresye } having wept. 2Xm x^ nott'a ^X' ^ Cl-nonnanta JC "^r Clnohatta ^tA ^notk'eitta nohara notch'a nonnan noheun noheul nott'en ^^ J^ "61. Cl nohatten Vf^ "51. noha Jjl 'Si^^ nohasye I release, etc. I released, etc. I shall release. release. let us release. releasing. released. about to release. released. released. "having released. 21 82 COREAN MANUAL. .^fl Cl ssitta, I v/ash. Indicative Present Past Future Imperative .^M 'C\' ssitta ^1 V i^^ssinnanta -^ /^ Cvesissetta >^ tA T^saitkeitta >^ Xt ^Lssisse»a ^J j^L ssitcha Eel. Part. Present ,, Past Future ssmnan ssissan ssissal ^^ ,, Imperfect .^« p| ssitteu washed ,, Perfect >^ >^ C?] ssissetten washed Verbal Participle ^^A >^"j ssisse „ „ aA /A JA ssissesye j I wash, etc. I washed, etc. I shall wash, etc. wash. let us wash. washincf. washed, about to v/ash. having washed. 7I ^ 1^ "rt kitarita, I wait. Indicative e Present >> )> >i Past >> Future Imperative kitarita kitarinta 1 {-I wait, etc. J 'll ^ 54 X\ kitaryetta I waited, etc. 'yl "O Si ^I C-i. kitarikeitta I shall wait, etc. 7l ^ ^ ^f kitaryera wait. ■7I tS 3| ^\ kitaricha let us wait. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 83 Rel. Part. Present y] "O 21 ^ kitarinan Past 71 ^ ^ kitarin ,, Future y\ ^ ^ kitaril ,, Imperfect 7| '^ ^ ^ kitariten Perfect 7] ^ ^ ^ kitaryetten Verbal Participle -^l XS ^ kitarye waiting, waited. about to wait, waited, waited. havinc: waited. CCL antta, I sit. Indicative Present > >> it^^ annanta J „ Past ^i^^ ancbyetta I sat, etc. „ Future 0^77]]^ ankkeitta I sball sit, etc, Imperative 1i^^ ancbyera sit. >> 'd^ anchcba let us sit. E^l. Part. Present <»ife annan sitting. Past > >' ^J:^^ ancbyegye ' 84 COEEAN MANUAL. ^ "Ci- alta, I know. Indicative Present »» >> alta anta • I know, etc. „ Past ^3^^^ aratta I knew, etc. „ Future "i^^ alkeitta I shall know, etc, Imperative t*K arara know. >> t4 alcha let us know. Kel. Part. Present 4^ an an knowing. „ Past 'i an known. Future t al about to know. „ Imperfect U'd alten known. ,, Perfect "l^^'d aratten know. Verbal Participle 6J.0V ara * 1 having known. >> »> t**H arasye J ■O ^ Vl morota, I know not. Indicative Present JL 5. ^ '»<"^<"* 1 i know not, etc. a ^ -CJ. moronta ) >» >» Past -§• vj- "Cl mollatta I knew not, etc. Future ^ "^ 7^] "Cl morokeitta I shall not know, etc. Imperative (not in use). * ara is also used colloquially for "J know" and *'do you knoto", etc. 1 CONJUGATION OF \T:RBS. 85 Eel. Part. Present ,2. ^ Jf moronan knowing not. ,, Past ^ ^ moron unknown. „ Future J3. ^ morol about to know not. „ Imperfect ,, Perfect ^ ^ p| moroten J^ xX- t^ mollatten unknown, unknown. Verbal Participle -2* vL molla * not ha\ing known. Section 2.— POLITE CONJUGATION. Tbis conjugation is that most in use imperatively, affirmatively and interrogatively, ^\^len used interrogatively the sound of the final o is prolonged and emphasised. hao hayesso hakeisso kao kasso kakeisso o oasso okeisso make {imperative) ; I make, do I make? I have made, have I made ? I shall make, shall I make ? go ; I go, do I go ? I have gone, have I gone ? I shall go, shall I go ? come ; I come, do I come ? I have come, have I come ? I shall come, shall I come ? * molla is also used colloquially for "IJinotc not" ''do you hnoio not" etc. Note. — The future, alJceitta and morolieitta (as also the forms alkeisso and morokeisso of the polite conjugation) are frequently used for the present tense, I know and / do not know. 22 86 COKE AN MANUAL. 5! 4^ ISSO issesso itkeisso epso epsesso epkcisso poo poasso pokeisso cli'io ch'yesso ch'ikeisso chouo chouesso choukeisso mekso mekesso mekkeisso chap so chapasso chapkeisso nosso iiobasso nok'cisso be ; I am or have, am or have I ? I was or had, was or had I ? I shall be or have, shall I be or have ? I am or have not, am or have I not ? I v/as or had not, was or had I not ? I shall not be or have, shall I not be or have ? look ; I look, do I look ? I have looked, have I looked ? I shall look, shall I look ? strike ; I strike, do I strike ? I have struck, have I struck ? I shall strike, shall I strike ? give; I give, do I give? I have given, have I given ? I shall give, shall I give ? eat ; I eat, do I eat ? I have eaten, have I eaten ? I shall eat, shall I eat ? seize, I seize, do I seize ? I have seized, have I seized ? I shall seize, shall I seize ? release ; I release, do I release ? I have released, have I released ? I shall release, shall I release ? CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 87 ^>fc ssisso wash ; I wash, do I wash ? 4S4^ ssissesso I have washed, have I washed ? ^^^ ssitkeisso I shall wash, shall I wash ? y] ^^ ^ kitario wait ; I wait, do I wait ? 7] ^5 di kitaryesso I have waited, have I waited ? 7]^^ ^^ kitarikeisso I shall wait, shall I wait ? ansso ancheuo sit ; I sit, do I sit'? - JL U t+ Ilose,welose,heloses, en* 4 tJ N M e ^ U "I I they lose, ilt'a ilsamnaita ilsaomnaita ^4 t^^l4 ^^^"-^^ tamla tamsamnaita tamsaomnaita I fill, we fill, he fills, they fill. dXxX 6iy^ U Cl 6l->t -^V-l Cl I embrace, we embrace \L \ U. tl ^1 r U. ^ U /*! r he embraces, etc. anta ansamnaita ansaomnaita vf r ^ t3 i r ^ ^ H N V seizes, they seize. chapi a chapsamnaita chapsaomnaita A tl J^ ^ xA Ct Jl} J^ JL yJ Cl I, l^f^cl, we load, he Oi *^r ^< \i ^1 *^r Oi "^ « "I r loads, they load, sitta sissamnaita sissaomnaita Similarly sapnaita and saopnaita are substituted for the final ta of the Indicative Past and Future tenses of the Ordinary Conjugation. Thus — hayetta hayessamnaita hayessaomnaita ■t ^ '^ ^ ^1/%^]^ -f >3 .>^ 1.^1 4' et" "''"• hakeitta hakeissamnaita hakeissaomnaita '^ 51 4 '^ 5J ^ ^1 4 '^ 5! >* -i- ^1 -^^ ^'«' «'- mol.etta mekessamnaita mekessaomnaita ^ ^ ^ ^ 7j| >§ V| t^ "^ ^^ ^^"^^ shall eat, etc. mekkeitta mekkeissamnaita • mekkeissaomnaita ^4 ^ ^- V) 4 ^^ ^ v) 4 I came, etc. oatta oassamnaita oassaomnaita JL794 -^^^^)4 J:^>*4v)'^etc*^"^°""'' okeitta okcissamnaita okeissaomnaita CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 91 Section S.—INTEEEOGATIVE CONJUGATION. In addition to the Interrogative of the Pohte Conjugation ending in o and so, which is used betv>"een equals in social and official rank, or towards superiors, in ordinary conversation, the Corean verb possesses a separate conjugation for addressing questions to inferiors, which is formed by substituting nanya or tenya for the final ta of the present, past and future tenses of the Ordinary Conjugation. The suffix nanya may be considered the regular interrogative available generally ; whereas the form in tenya is specially employed where the enquiry is made regarding action not immediately under the eye of the speaker. Further, ha-tenya, for example, has not a Present tense meaning but is properly an Imperfect ; hananya, being the interrogative for time strictly present. Again, hayettenya refers to a past even further remote than the form hayennanya. In hakeittenya, the Future, the enquiry contains an appeal for the opinion of the person addressed, and that particularly where the enquiry is made with reference to a third party not present to the speakers; hakeintianya on tha other hand refers to the future merely. Such at least are the leading principles governing the application and use of the two interrogative suffixes. "t ^1 *t hananya do I make ? dost thou make ? etc. hayennanya have I made? etc. hakeinnanya will T make ? etc. hatenya was I making? etc. hayettenya did I make ? etc. hakeittenya shall I make ? etc. kananya do I go ? dost thou go ? does he go ? etc. kannanya have I gone? etc. Mi kakeinnanya will I go? etc. katenya was I going? etc. kattenya did I go? etc. r kakeittenya shall I go? etc. 9-2 COKEAN MANUAL. -IV »1= onanya do I come '? etc. ^VH= oannanya have I come? etc. ^Tj) V »i= okeinnanya will I come ? etc. S.^ V: otenya was I coming? etc. ^^1^ oattenya did I come ? Jft.7llt^v|: okeittenya shall I come ? etc. ^^^ innanya have I ? {or am I ?) etc. 5!4v'^f^ issennanj'a have I had ? etc. 5l^ V'F itkeinnanya will I have ? etc. 5l'>i''l= ittenya was I having? etc. 514^ ^ issettenya did I have ? etc. 5i^''1'^ itkeittenya shall I have ? etc. 'SJ V »^ emnanya have I not ? etc. {or am I not ? etc) *34 v^ epsennanya have I not had? etc. ^ ^iv'l^ epkeinnanya will I not have ? etc. ^^1*1= eptenya was I not having? etc. ^3 4^^ epsettenya did I not have ? etc. ';3eil^''l= epkeittenya shall I not have? etc. oj-V "> ananya know I? etc. t^vH= arannanya have I known ? etc. -^7!iV Vj: alkeinnanya will I know ? etc. *1^ v> altenya was I knowing? etc. CJ-CJ.^^ V): arattenya knew I? etc. -^^^^ alkeittenya shall I know? etc. CONJUGATION OF \^RBS. 93 J?_ ?■_ ^ ^r moronanya "h!" yi ^ \ mollannanya 3- ^ -^ ^ ^ inorokeinnanys JjlL ,S. ^ ^ morotenya H. >4 f I mollatteDya '-J- '^ >[; '^ ^ morokeittenya ponanya poannanya pokeinnanya potenya poattenya pokeittenya know I not ? etc. have I not known ? etc, will I not know? etc. was I not knowing ? etc. knew I not ? etc. shall I not know? etc. do I see? etc. have I seen ? etc. will I see ? etc. . was I seeing? etc. did I see ? etc. shall I see? etc. Sbction a.— conjunction CONJUGATION. Under this conjugation are included the various agglutinations and suffixes, which are employed to express condition, time, reason, conjunctions — copulative and disjunctive — and even punctuation. But inasmuch as the presenta- tion of a complete paradigm of these varying modifications with all their niceties of distinction would necessitate a volume to itself and only encumber and perplex the student, it has been considered advisable to give here only the more important modifications — such at least as occur most frequently in current collo- quial. These embody the leading principles governing this verb inflexion and will enable the student to work out, as he becomes more and more familiarized with the language, the system of word-building and aggutination peculiar to Corean. Many of the particles used in connecting sentences — subordinate and co-ordinate — are meaningless in themselves but are required for euphony, either replacing our English conjuctions or merely indicating the punctuation. It may be well said indeed that a mastery of the Corean verb implies a full knowledge of the Corean language. 24 94 COEEAN MANUAL. I. — CONDITIONAL SUFFIXB8. Tho suffixes X3^ myen and "H .5^ keteun express condition with a force corresponding to our word "if" in connecting a subordinate clause with the principal clause of a sentence. Myen, with or without the conjugation tiL o| manil, can be used generally, but where the idea of uncertainty or of time is connoted and especially where the principal and subordinate clauses contain different subjects to their respective predicates, keteun is the suffix employed. The present tense is formed by substituting myen for the final I of the Future Relatire Participle, thus — hata, I make pota, I see mekta, I eat t T "?! hal {Fut. Part) . hamyen, if I make. 4 pol {Fut Part). pomyen, if I see. mekeul {Fut Part), mekeumyen, if I eat. The other tenses are formed from the Ordinary Conjugation by substituting simyen, keteun and temyen for the ordinary terminations of the present, past, future, imperfect and pluperfect tenses. Present Past Future Imperfect Pluperfect hamyen haketeun If I make, if thou makest, if he make, if we make, etc. ■f 5^ ^1 "d hayessimyen L^ j ^^^^^ ^^^ -5^ M -J xZ_ hayetketeun j '^ ^ -^1 "Jl^akeissimyen^j^ j ^^^^jj ^^^^j.^.^ ^tc. ^ -ji ^ -^ hakeitketeun ) "St 'd ^ hatemyen If I was making, etc «g» 6:^ pi td hayettemyen If I had made, etc. CONJUGATION OF VEKBS. 95 Present >i Past Future >» Imperfect Pluperfect Present »> Past >> Future ji Imperfect Pluperfect Present j» Past Future >> Imperfect Pluperfect If I shall come, etc. If I was coming, etc. If I had come, etc. -Jx* ti }If I came, etc. A -t) -^ oketeun 51.^1 ^ oassimyen , ZZ } \l yif I come, etc. 5m. "T" -^ oatketeun JJL ^ ^1 Da okeissimyen ^ :^ ^ ^okeitketeun ^ "Cl "l^ otemyen 5l '^ ^ oattemyen tJJ ^t^ mekeumyen L^ j ^^^^ ^^^_ pj — J ^ mekketeun ) ^ 5J ^1 ^ mekessimyen U^ j ^^^^ ^^^^ |0 ^ ««l ^ meketketeun ) 13? 7?] Xl Q^ mekkeissimyen I T >i r ll llf I shall eat, etc ^ 7?l '7^ ^ mekkeitketeun ^ "Ol ^ mektemyen If I was eating, etc. t^ 64 -^ a^ mekettemyen If I had eaten, etc. \^ 13a pomyen ijf ^ J^ poketeun JL ^>^] '^ poassimyen |j^ ^ ^^^^ ^^^^ o ^1 ^ tS poatketeun J JL ^ ^] ^ pokeissimyen | j^ j ^^^^j^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^ ^1 -J tS pokeitketeun J ^ ^ 13^ potemyen If I was seeing, etc. ^ 61. X?| ^ poattemyen If I had seen, etc. .If I see, etc. 9G COKEAN MANUAL. EXEKCISE XXII. % ^k ^1^ il dial hamyen S3'angkeup choukeitta work well if you make gratuity I will give If you do the work well I will give you a gratuity. pohaing koun oketeun naikei cheuksi mal hayera courier if come to me instantly speech make Let me know at once when the courier comes. t r> --t ^^^1-^ ^^) 44 tarn mounhechyessimyen tasi ssara wall if fell into ruins again build Build up the wall again if it has fallen down. ^ "^ ^ ^^W S^)'^ nenan as for you keu yak that medicine mekkeissimyen if you will eat You will do right to take that medicine chyok'eitta it will be good ch'aik pokeitketeun kachye-kakera book if you will see taken-go Should you see this book you can take it away. 1 this naika keu killo otemyen mannatkeisso * I that . by road if was coming would have met If I came by that road I would have met him. 7. :x ^ } keu sarameul poattemyen ton chouetkeisso * that man if I had seen money would have given If I had seen the man I would have given him the money. * Future Perfect tense. The construction and meaning of this tense form arc explained in a separate section on a subsequent page. CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. 9T II. — CAUSAL SUFFIXES. As, since, because, etc. are rendered by the suffixes Vl ni, Vj yn, nihJca, Vl 771* "CI ^^ nikJcanteuro. The suffix ni has two distinct uses : (1) First, it is used as a purely causal conjunction, connecting the parts of a sentence which stand to one another in the relation of cause and effect. Under such conditions it is restricted to the regular tenses, present, past and fature. The two encHtic particles kka and khanteuro are frequently found added to ni both for purposes of euphony and especially for the purpose of emphasizing its causal force, when connecting the subordinate with the principal part of a sentence. At the same time 7ii and its enclitics also appear in phrases where their meaning and application may best be indicated by punctuation marks in English and where the relation of cause and effect between different parts of the sentence can be clearly understood without being particularized by any conjunction. keul chal hani koake hakeisso letters well as he makes examination will make As he is a good scholar, he will get his degree. ^^] y}^ J.^ jtH 14 jL-t echyei kasye onal oni pounchyou hao yesterday having gone today as I come I am busy Gone yesterday, here today ; 1 am busy. %t>] ^\^:^} 5 7} J. nari ch'anikka mot kao day as is cold not go I cannot go, it is chilly. moksyou onikka 11 toikeitta carpenter as is coming work will become As the carpenter is coming, the work will be done. param pounikkanteuro silkoa tterechyesso wind as is blowing fruit has fallen The fruit fell down with the wind. (2) The suffix 7ii, as found in the agglutination teni, has a purely disjunctive force. It indicates a break in the sequence of the ideas of the speaker — something unexpected, as it were — which can be best rendered by means of an adversative conjunction such as but. The agglutination teni occurs in the Imperfect, the Pluperfect and the Past Intentional {was about to do) tenses. 25 98 COKEAN MANUAL, ^^1 ^^^ ^^^ >^)»9- nongsa hao chyenei chyangsa hateni sipang before trade he was making now he farms He was once a merchant but now he is a farmer. onal okeitteni iri issesye mot oasso today I was about to come work having been not I come I was coming today but was detained on business. hani hayessini hakeissini hateni hayetteni hakeitteni oni oassini okeissini oteni oatteni okeitteni kani kassini kakeissini kateni katteni kakeitteni I make, so ... etc. I have made, so ... etc. I will make, bo ... etc. I was making, but ... etc. I had made, but ... etc. I was about to make, but ... etc. I come, so ... etc. I come, so ... etc. I will come, so ... etc. I was coming, but ... etc. I had come, but ... etc. I was abou-t to come, but ... etc. I go, so ... etc. I went, so ... etc. I will go, 80 ... etc. I was going, but ... etc. I had gone, but ... etc. I was about to go, but ... etc. CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. 99 chouni chouessini choukeissini chouteni chouetteni choukeitteni I give, so ... etc. I give, so ... etc. I will give, so ... etc. I was giving, but ... etc. I had given, but ... etc. I was about to give, but . etc. Exercise XXTIL 1. sonnim guesc ■^^ JlH 4^^ hana 3. ^1 ^1 i* ^ ^ o-ni eumsik yeipihayera one comes-as food prepare There is a guest coming so get dinner ready. taikeun chyangsa chal ha-ni pouchya toikeisso as for you sir trade well makes-as rich will become You are an able merchant, sir, and so will be rich. p'okyoka tochekeul chapassini syangkeup patkeisso police thief has-taken-as gratuity will receive As the poHce have caught the thief they will be rewarded. 3.^7} 5:^4 4 ^^o\^ ^k ^ ^^^ p'okyoka tochekeul chapasye syangkeup patasso police thief having caught gratuity rewarded The police having caught the thief got the reward. echeinan syoulkap chouteni onareun sak man chouo as for yesterday reward was giving as for today wages only give Yesterday he gave a gratuity but today he gives only wages. a>>| 6]^ jLt^v) ^^1^ 7^^^) -|v|. keu saram iri oteni etairo kannanchi molla that man here was coming where to go I know not He was coming here but I can't tell where he has gone. '& 100 COEEAN MANUAL. EXEBCISE XXIII (cojitinued). chim ta kachye-oatteni toro ta kachye-kasso load all taken-came back all taken-gone He brought all the baggage but he took it all away again. mourei ppachye chonkkeitteni ettensarami kenchyesso in water fallen he was about to die some-body saved He fell into the water but somebody saved him from drowning. ni. — ADVERSATIVE SUFFIXES. The suffix OL ^ vianan is the regular adversative conjunction corres- ponding to the English huty yet, etc., and is added as an agglutinative particle to the regular tenses, present, past and future, of the Ordinary Conjugation without any modification or euphonic change. The conjugation ending in chi, formed by the substitution of clii for the final ta of the Ordinary Conjugation, is very commonly used where respect or courtesy is intended towards superiors or equals ; and to this chi the suffix manan is regularly added, to express a disjunctive 'break in the sentence. At the same time this form of the conjugation in chi is likewise used to convey the idea of uncertamty or doubt together with a sense of deliberation on the part of the speaker. The forms hata-manan, etc. {i. e. the conjugation in ta), are properly confined to addressing one's in- feriors in rank. These conjugations are regular and simple, and present no difi&culty to the student as regards either their acquisition or explanation. In using manan as an adversative suffix to any verb, Corean syntax frequently requires that the verbal noun of this same verb — in the oppositive case — shall immediately precede the verb with the adversative suffix, thereby emphasizing and helping out the meaning. At times a certain restrictive sense is conveyed by this construction corresponding more or less to the English phrases "of course," "somewhat," "I allow, " etc. This idiom constantly occurs in Corean colloquial, with various other suffixes such as to, tax, kenioa, etc., attached to the predicate, and forms one of the principal uses for which the verbal noun (in the oppositive case) appears in the Corean language. Further, manan is employed as a disjunctive agglutination, with the verb in the Polite Conjugation, being merely added as a suffix to its endings in o. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 101 ^ ^ hata-manan hachi-manan hayetta-maman hayetchi-manan hakeitta-manan hakeitchi-manan onta-manan ochi-manan oatta-manan oatchi-manan okeitta-manan okeitchi-manan ponta-manan pochi-majian poatta-manan poatchi-manan pokeitta-manan pokeitchi-maiian meknanta-manan mekchi-manan meketta-manan meketchi-manan mekkeitta-manan mekkeitchi-manan 'I make, but ... etc. I made, but ... etc. I shall make, but ... I come, but ... etc. etc. I came, but ... etc. ■I will come, but ... etc. I, see, but etc. I saw, but ... etc. I shall see, but etc. J •I eat, but ... etc. ■I ate, but ... etc. .1 shall eat, but etc. 102 CORE AN MANUAL. Exercise XXIY. 3. echei oatchi-manan taikeul mot poasso yesterday I came-but (you) sir not saw I came yesterday but I did not see you. ^^ ^1^ 4^ «pf -I ^ -t^ onal kanta-manan pika ol-teut hata today I go-but rain coming-likely makes I am going today but it looks like rain. i ton choukeitta-manan houei ettek'ei kapkeinnanya this money I will give-but after how will repay I will give you this money but how will you repay me. 4. *]= ol^l »j 5J >t] u^^ J^^ 6) c^^ yak manhi meketchi-manan hyohemi epso medicine many I have eaten-but advantage is not I have taken ever so much medicine but am no better. alki-nan anta-manan p'oulkinan eryepta knowing-as-for I know-but explanation-as-for it is difficult I understand the meaning but it is difficult to explain. '■ y} y]^y}t ^1 °f ii ^^1 ^i >d^1 j^ 5. ^ cf kaki-nan kakeitchi-manan enchei kal-nenchi morokeitta going-as for I will go-but when to be about to go I will not know Of course I will go but I cannot tell when I will go. natki-nan natta-manan acho natchi mot hata recovery-as for I recover- but entirely to recover not I make I am somewhat better in health but I cannot recover entirely. 8. J. ^J; 4t 7] fe: ^^°}^ ^^ 0^ ^^ keu k'al sseuki-nan sseunta-manan chal an teulta that knife using-as for I use-but well not enter I can use the knife of course but it is not at all sharp. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 103 IV. — CONCESSIVE SUFFIXES. Though, although, etc. are rendered by the suffixes vL;2a, cl tai, S^to,y^ VJ $JLke7iioa and^l '^ ^chirato. With na and tai the present tense is formed by substituting these suffixes for I final of the future relative participle. The past and future tenses are formed by substituting si, as a euphonic connecting parciciple, for ta final of these tenses in the Ordinary Conjugation and then adding ?ia or tai as the case may be. In the case of to, the present tense, is invariably formed by adding the concessive suffix to the first form of the verbal participle, i. e. the form without the euphonic ending in sye. For the past and future tenses, se is substituted for ta final of these tenses in the Ordinary Conjugation and then to is appended as the conjunctional agglutination. With kenioa, the present and past tenses are formed by substituting the suffix for the final ta of the Ordinary Conjugation. But for the future tense an entirely new form is constructed. The final I of the futm-e relative participle is modified into rye {iiye where the verbal stem is distinguished by J) signifying ''about to," ''intending to," etc., while kenioa is likewise modified and becomes nioa, so that we get the termination ryenioa or nyenioa. The suffixes na, tai and to are at times practically interchangeable in meaning and use; but while tai and to are strong concessive conjunctions equivalent to though, although, etc., na is frequently found to fairly represent our English "whether" and that especially with such verbs as "to tell," "to know," and "to see," etc. Kenioa is concessive as regards the subordinate clause, being equivalent to "admitting that," "allowing that," "even though," etc., but in introducing the principal clause it marks a break in the sequence of ideas correspond- ing to yet, still, or hut, etc., the principal clause being generally in the interroga- tive or imperative mood. Kenioa may well be translated "notwithstanding" . With tai, to, and kenioa, the verbal substantive in the oppositive case is constantly found associated, preceding the verb to which these suffixes are attached. It is an idiomatic construction peculiar to the Corean language but extremely useful in helping out the meaning of the sentence, emphasizing and modifying the action of the predicate. Thus kakinan kato, "as for going though I go" , meaning "even tJwiigh I go, of course, or "admitting that I go," etc. The suffix chirato is confined to the future and pluperfect relative parti- ciples and followed respectively by the future and future perfect in the principal clause. 104 COEEAN MANUAL. liana hatai hayeto Though I make, etc. hayerfsiiia hayessitai hayesseto Though I made, etc. hakeissina hakeissitai hakeisseto Though I shall make, etc. "9 J^l ijl Si. halchirato Though I may make, etc. haj'essilchirato Though I had made, etc. hakenioa hayetkenioa haryenioa t ^ ^a ^1 ^ S ^f^ 7] ^] 7)- S ^\i\^^ kana katai kato Though I go, etc. kakenioa ^^)4 ^^1 '^l ^^1 ^ ^7]H4 kassina kassitai kasseto Though I went, etc. katkenioa 7} yjl^] vf yM^]"^] 7f7j|xis y}^^^ kakeissina kakeissitai kakeisseto Though I shall go etc. karyenioa t^l ^-s. kal chirato Though I may go etc. yjt^l^\^s. kassil chirato Though •> — • I had gone, etc. t^^v^ oj^c] ^^(^^ ^7]H4 mekeuna mekeutai meketo mekkenioa Though I eat, etc. ^5!^K l^l^l.'^l ^^^Is. 15!71H4 mekessina mekessitai mekesseto meketkenioa Though I ate, etc. I^^]"!- ^^n^)"^] '^^a^l^ "^^^^^ mekkeissina mekkeissitai mekkeisseto mekeuryenioa Though I shall eat, etc. mekeulchirato Though I may eat, etc. mekessilchirato Though I had eaten, etc. CONJUGATION OF VEKBS. 105 ^Av^ ^}±<\ ^j-oj-S ^J-7|v]4 chapeuua chapeutai chapato chapkenioa Though I take, etc. chapassina chapassitai chapasseto chapatkenioa Though I took, etc. 4^2^)1^ ^^^A^]<\ ^J-^HS ^j-A3lv|4 chapkeissina chapkeissitai chapkeisseto chapeuryenioa Though I shall take, etc. >^ a" ^1 ^ j£ chapeulchirato Though I may take, etc. 'm' jt ^ ^1 ^ S- chapassilchirato Though I had taken, etc. 5! A H- 5! A 'J] ^, *^ 5: 5! 7] v^ 4 eteuna eteutai eteto etkenioa Though I get, etc. 5I5J/^IH- 5!5!^H1 5! 51^1-^ ^ 5J t] v] 4 etessina etessitai etesseto etetkenioa Though I got, etc. ^^:^K 5!^/^l'^l ^^^1S 5!a^H4 etkeissina etkeissitai etkeisseti) etauryenioa Though I shall get, etc. ^ 'S- ^1 ^ £ eteulchirato Though I may get, etc. j1 ^ ^ ^ ^ £. etessilchirato Though I had got, etc. Sana satai sarato salkenioa Though I live, etc. ^i^A]x^ ^i^A]^] ^i^^^Si ^151-7] H4 Barassina sarassitai sarasseto saratkenioa Though I lived, etc. ^^^^IM- >^^a^l'^] ^^^^15: ^^v^H^ salkeissina salkeissitai salkeisseto sallyenioa Though I shall live, etc. '^d I ^ J5c» salchirato Though 1 may live, etc- ^^» ^^ -^1 ^.ii. sarassilchirato Though I had hved, etc. 27 106 COREAN MANUAL. Exercise XXV. '^^^^ ^^^^] -f^ ^y} ^^ chyangsanan pouchareni hana rika epso as for trade diligently though I make profit is not Though I attend well to business, I never make any profit. 2. JLI "i^o] ^^iS ^^] ^4 onal ilcheuki oasseto sseul-tai epso today early though you came about-to-use-place is not Though you came early today, it is useless. mal keurek'ei hakinan hayeto heuni ani sseuo speech thus as for saying though I say commonly not use Though such an expression may be used, it is not common. 4.6^ H^ ^f^l 151^1^1- St ^ J.^^ yak yere kachi mekessina hyohem mot poasso medicine several kinds though he ate advantage not has seen Though he has tried all kinds of medicine, he is no better. 5. tochekeul chapeulcihrato moulkeneun ch'atki eryepta thief though you may take as for articles finding is difficult Even though you catch the thief, it will be difficult to find the booty. echei oassilchirato taikeul mot mannatkeisso yesterday though I had come you (sir) not I would have met Though I had come yesterday I would not have met you. 7 7^:^1 y}y]^ y}^^^\ ^] -?■ ^'S -f «i 4 kekeui kakinan karyenioa maiou chosim hayera there as for going though will go very careful make Though you may go there of course, still be very careful. nanan chipei kakenioa nenan etai kakeinnanya as for me to home though go as for you where will go ? Though I go home, where are you going to ? i CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. 107 V. — DELIBERATIVE AND ALTEEXATIVE SUFFIXES. Whether, or, etc. are rendered by the suffixes VL7^a, y^ V\^Jce7ia, ^ yV nanha, }^ ^1 nanchi, Cq >^i te7ichi,jM chi, and v^ ^j jienchi. {a) Na and ^g?i3^. The suffix na, in addition to its use as a concessive conjunction (though), has an alHed meaning {whether), when employed to mark alternatives, especially where the verb is repeated or otherwise placed in opposi- tion. Under these conditions the original force of na as a concessive conjunc- tion {though) can still be evolved ; but the use of the alternatives whether and whether ... or, more correctly conveys the sense of the Corean idiom in this connection. This conjugation is simply formed by the substitution of 7ia for the final ta of the Present, Past and Future tenses of the Ordinary Conjugation. From the Future Relative Participle (ending in sal, eul, etc.) of certain verbs, yet another "alternative" tense, ending in na is derived, by the substitu- tion of na for the final I of the participle. This appears constantly in the language, being well suited to the euphonic requirements of Corean speech. It is restricted to the present tense and, as a strong alternative, has the same force as the termination in kena. This form in ite^ia appears only in the Present and Psist tenses. It has a strong "alternative" sense (whether ... or), and is much used by Coreans in ordinary conversation. Where however the idea of future action is understood, recourse is had to the gerundive ending in rye, etc., the verb ^a^o. being utilized as an auxiliary and becoming hakena for the Future simple and hayetkena for Future Perfect. Thus kal, the Future Eelative Participle of kanta, I go), becomes karye, (about to go or intending to go) ; and we thus get harye- hakena (though I intend to go — though I will go, etc). ^4 hana -f 7l ^ hakena Whether I do, etc. ^^H- hayenna -3" ^ T) ^tiayetkena „ I did, etc. ^^^ hakeinna „ I will do, etc. j.^ ona -6.71 ^ okena Whether I come, etc. ^^ oanna ^Tjv^ oatkena ,, I came, etc. j.^"} okeinna „ I will come, etc. 7}"} kana ^}y]^ kakena Whether I go, etc. ^4 kanna ^7] ^f katkena ,, I went, etc. ^l-^'f kakeinna ,, I shall go, etc. 10€ \ COEEAN MANUAL. 51^ inna 51 >t 4 51 7)4 issana itkena ► Whether lam, etc. ^4^ issenna 5!47]^ issetkena „ I was, etc. 51 ^H- itkeinna „ I shall be, etc. 'a^ emna *J>*v^ epsana 1 epkena J Whether I am not, etc. *a7]vf 'iJ^^ epsenna ^3471 1 epsetkena „ I was not, etc. *3^ll^ epkeinna „ I shall not be etc. ^J-^ chamna chapeuna chapkena -Whether I take, etc. 451:'^ chapanna ^^^y]"^ chapatkena ,, I took, etc. 4 51H- chapkeinni l ,, I shall take, etc. ^vf. mekua mekeuna mekkena ■Whether I eat, etc. tt 51^ mekenna -J5l7|v} meketkena ,, I ate, etc. x> 1^3 »+ mekkeinna I :xvi. „ I shall eat, etc. Exercise 3 -£ ^>t4 <3>^^ ^^ 'i^ ton issana epsana kekchyeng money whether is whether is not anxiety I don't care whether there is any money or not. epso is not chana kkaina nicheul sou whether I sleep whether I wake forgetting means Sleeping or waking I will never forget (this). epso are not CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 109 EXEBCISE XXVI {continued). ona kana il pan io whether he comes whether he goes one sort is It is all the same whether he comes or goes. k'euna chyekeuna kapseun match'ihankachi whether large whether small as for price much the same Large or small, the price is much the same. 5 ^ v|. 6). v) ^i\ 7> -f e| ^- 6). ?f oanna ani oanna ka moure-poara. whether he has come not whether he has come having gone enquire-Ee*^ Go and ascertain whether he has come or not. 6. I pai enchei ttenakeinna ka al-ko onera ship when will depart go know-and come Go and find out when the ship will sail, 7. a % V) 0^ ^ 5| /J! vf ^ 5|^vf. keu il nai-il ta toikeinna mot toikeinna that work tomorrow all v, ill become not will become "Will that work be finished tomorrow or not. 8. -f 7^ ^ °^ 7] »| ^J 7| «j] X -f jt. hakena malkena saingkak tairo hao whether you do whether you don't thought according to make Please yourself whether you do this or not. chonkkena salken naiye parye touera whetlier he dies whether he lives having thrown awaj'' put Leave him alone to live or die. 28 110 COEEAN MANUAL. (6) Nanka,nancJii, tenclii, cJii and nenchi. These five suffixes are also employed to express whether and whether ... or, but under distinct conditions. Nanka is confined to verbs of "enquiry" etc, either expressed or understood, and in the latter case it has the force of an interrogative, indicating doubt, hesitation or deliberation on the part of the speaker. The various sufl&xes ending in chi appear chiefly in connection with the verb vioronta (I know not). But the ending in nanchi can also be utilized as an interrogative of doubt or hesitation in informal conversation with equals or inferiors. Tenchi, in addition to its use in connection with verbs, appears frequently as a sufSx joined to nouns placed in opposition to one another. It is connected with the noun by the uniper- sonal verb ilta (is) and corresponds to our English sufiix ever, but with the additional sense of whether ... or. Chi and nenchi appear only suffixed to the Future Relative Participle in I, Corean euphony requiring that the initial t of tenchi should pass into 71 (0 in order to coalesce with the I final of this participle form. SiUenchi, as in hayessiUe7ichi, is an ever recurring form in Corean, and is found substituted for ta final of the past tense of the Ordinary Conjugation. It has a dubitative meaning at times, equivalent to whether I would have, etc, and by some has accord- ingly been termed a Future Perfect. With the intricacies and anomalies of Corean colloquial, it is practically impossible to lay down hard rules to explain idiomatic construction ; but with the leading principles here enunciated, it is hoped that the student may at least obtain a clue amid the vagaries and perplexities of the language. Whether I make, etc. ,, I made, etc. ,, I will make, etc. ^^^} hananka ^^^y] hayennanka -^ ^^y hakeinnanka t fe^l hananchi ^^si^i hayennanchi -f 'd^l hatenchi -f^^^i 1 hayettenchi t^] halchi t^^l hallenchi -t^^^ 1 jXl hayessillenchi Whether I make, etc. ,, I made, etc. Whether I make, etc. ,, I had made, etc. r Whether I shall make, etc. ,, I have made, etc. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. Ill ^^y} innanka Whether I am, etc. ^'i^^y issennanka „ I were, etc. ^^^^} itkeinnanka ,, I shall be, etc. ^2^^] innanchi Whether I am, etc. 514^^1 issennanchi ,, I were, etc. 51 'a ^] ittenchi Whether I am, etc. ^^-d^l issettenchi ,, I had been, etc. issalchi issallenchi " Whether I shall be, etc. ^d^l^^] issessillenchi ,, I have been, etc. ^^yy onanka Whether I come, etc. ^^yy oannanka „ I came, etc. j-d^^y okeinnanka ,, I shall come, etc. -^^^] oiianchi ^Miether I come, etc. ^^^] oannanchi „ I came, etc. -^^^1 otenchi Whether I come, etc. ^^d^l oattenchi „ I had come, etc. -1^1 olchi ^Whether I shall come, et( -l>d^l ollenchi ) ^^a>d^l oassillenchi „ I have come, etc. 112 COEEAN MANUAL. 7) Til {r ^V toinanka toiyennanka toikeinnanka toitenchi toiyettenchi toilchi toillenchi toiyessillenchi kapnanchi kaphannanchi kaptenchi kaphattenchi kapheulchi kapheuUencbi kaphassillenchi Whether I become, etc. ,, I became, etc „ I shall become, etc. toinanchi Whether I become, etc. toiyennanchi „ I became, etc. Whether I become, etc. „ I had become, etc. Whether I shall become, etc, ,, I have become, etc. kapnanka Whether I pay, etc. kaphannanka „ I paid, etc. kapkeinnanka ,, I shall pay, etc. Whether I pay, etc. ,, I paid, etc. Whether I pay, etc. ,, I had paid, etc. Whether I shall pay, etc. ,, I have paid, etc. mekettenchi „ I had eaten, etc. /"Whether I shall eat, etc. mekeulchi raekeullenchi ) CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 113 ^ ^ yX meknanka Whether I eat, etc. ^ ^ \^ ^r mekennanka „ I ate, etc. T^ 7?| }C "^H mekkeinnanka „ I shall eat, etc. ^ JC >!t| meknanchi Whether I eat, etc. 1^ ^ ^ ^j mekennanchi „ I ate, etc. 1^ ^ >^| mektenchi Whether I eat, etc. oj 6^ >y V^ yl| mekessillenchi ,, I have eaten, etc. Exercise XXVTI. mokoun-teul ireul hananka am hananka moure-po cooUe's work whether make not whether make enqmre-see Ascertain whether the coohes are working or not. p'yenchi oannanka chikeum ka poara letter whether has come now go see Go now and see if the letters are come. pai enchei ttenakeinnanka chom ara posio boat when whether will depart httle know see please Please find out when the boat will leave. patkeui nouka oannanchi kai cheunnanta outside who whether came dog barks There is somebody outside— the dog is barking. keu saram etten-saram-incbi nenan ananya that man what-man-Hoever as for you do you know ? Do you know who that man is? •29 114 COEEAN MANUAL. Exercise XXYIII. 3. keu saram chipei innanchi emnanchi ananya that man at house whether is whether not is do you know ? Do you know whether that man is at home or not ? 6) «i| n^] ^j /^l 5l i£ ^1 JL 5. ?II -fc i ttai kkachi chipei innanchi morokeisso this time until in house whether is I will not know I do not know whether he is at home as yet. pohaingkoun kannanchi ani kannanchi al sou epso courier whether has gone not whether has gone know means are not I cannot tell whether the courier has gone or not. 4.$! 7)ta>] *^H ^M^] ^51 44 «f4 pit kaptenchi ani kaptenchi nenan syangkoan mara debt whether pay not whether pay as for you concern avoid It is no business of yours whether he pays or not. choukettenchi sarattenchi chapa onera whether he died whether he lived seize come Apprehend him dead or alive. ' ' j.% -£ ^^1 *fH -f^y '^K^ onal ton choulchi ani choulchi ananya today money whether will give not whether will give do you know ? Do you know whether he will give the money today? ^l«d^1 *i ^M^] *H ^'i ^3^ kallenchi an kallenchi achik chakchyeng epso whether I will go not whether I will go as yet decide not is It has not as yet been decided whether I go or not. ta toiyessillenchi chasyeihi morokeisso all whether has become accurately I will not know I cannot exactly tell whether it has been finished or not. 7. CONJUGATION OF VEKBS. 115 Exercise XXIX. syoul-kap choutenchi an cboutenchi nai kyeikoanchi ani hao wine-price whether give not whether give I to concern not make I don't care whether he gives a gratuity or not. 2. °t J. *^ ^ A ^ 5l ol 'J] 5: 4i e^ife manheuna chyekeuna innan-tairo sseukeisso whether many whether few being-according to will use Whether few or many, use what you have. kina chareuna ta kachye-onera whether long whether short all bring-come Bring them all whether long or short. toungkoulkena monakena sseuki-nan match'ankachi whether round whether square as for using much the same It will do equally well whether round or square. kem-tenchi heui-tenchi kapsi ban kachio black-whether white-whether price one sort is Whether black or white the price is the same. 6|e^ ^vf t^^ -fv^ f 4 6) J. iri hana chyeri ban a il pan io here though make there though make one sort is It is all the same whether you do it this way or that way. pis-ssatenchi nouktenchi cbikeumeun ton epsye mot sao whether dear whether cheap now as for money not being not buy Whether dear or cheap, I have no money and cannot buy it. encbei katenchi keu ttai pout'akhakeisso when whether go that time I will appeal I will appeal to him whenever he is going. 5. 7. 116 COREAN MANUAL. VI. — RESTRICTIVE CONDITIONAL SUFFIX. The suffix ya occurs in connection with the first form of the Perfect Participle and produces a sense corresponding to if only, unless, only after ... must, not unless, etc. i.e. a restrictive conditional in the Present Tense followed by the Future in the principal clause. The Past Tense is formed by substitu- ting se-ya for ta final in the Ordinary Conjugation ; it must be followed by the Future Perfect in the principal clause. The Future is similarly formed by substitu- ting se-ya for ta final of the Future of the Ordinary Conjugation ; but in Corean its place is generally taken by the present in ya, which as a Conditional Present naturally implies a contingent future — sufficiently at least to meet the require- ments of a Future Tense in Corean. -g- 6^ 61 '6|. ^1^ hayeya hayesseya hakeisseya 51^1*1= 51 7)1 X^ 6): isseya issesseya itkeisseya oaya oasseya okeisseya kaya kasseya kakeisseya 6): poaya poasseya pokeisseya If I only make, etc. If I only made, etc. If I only will make, etc. If I only be, etc. If 1 only were, etc. If I only will be, etc. If I only come, etc. If I only came, etc. If I only will come, etc. If I only go, etc. If I only went, etc. If 1 only will go, etc. If I only see, etc. If I only saw, etc. If I only will see, etc. CONJUGATION OF \^RBS. 117 Xrl 5J 61; mekeya If I only eat, etc. ^ ^ Xt 6fc mekesseya If I only ate, etc. Hi 7|| >^"l ^p mekkeisseya If I only will eat, etc. .^T 6u 6t chapaya If I only take, etc. >^ ^-^1 ^F chapasseya If I only took, etc. -^r 7|| >^"| ^p chapkeisseya If I only will take, etj I am making, etc. ^A ^^ haryemensye „ „ intend to make, etc ±^^ omyensye While I am coming, etc. 3.^^^ oryemyensye „ „ intend to come, etc. ^f-d^ kamyensye While I am going, etc. i}A '^^ karyemyensye „ ,, intend to go, etc. ^s-^^ kapheumyensye WTiile I am paying, etc. 7]-3:^ W^ kapheuryemyensye „ ,, intend to pay, etc. 120 COEEAN MANUAL. Exercise XXXL 1. ^^ :5,ft:}7|- s^4l -i^^ aeuikol kattaka tochekeul mannasso eountry when I went thieves I met When going to the country I was attacked by thieves. syeoul kataka pireul mannasso capital when I go rain I met It came on to rain when I was going to Soul. Syeoul kamyensye pireul machyetta capital while I go rain flogged It was raining while I went to Soul. seuikol kattaka yere nal manei toraoasso country when I went several days period I returned I went to the country but returned after several days. chipei karyetaka iri issesye mot kasso to house I intend to go work been not I went I intended going home but was detained by business. 6. 5.^44 -f^^l- ^^H f53^ tochekchil hataka chaphiye choukesso stealing action while he makes taken he died He was caught stealing and killed. 7. j^/^l -gj A 5J:T^ 7f i 47f °^ ^ t^ sf chasyeihi poattaka toraka mal hayera accurately when yoii have seen return speech make When you have seen (this) clearly go back and tell him. 8. ton kkouiye chouettaka nanpong nasso money lent when I gave spend thrift arose I gavo him the loan of the money but never got repaid. s. CONJUGATION OF VEKBS. 1-21 Exercise XXXII. ch'aik potaka nat houei nakapsyeita book when I see noon after let us go out Let us read the book now but go out in the afternoon. keu ttai oryetaka momi apha mot oasso that time while I intend to come body sore not came I was coming then but was ill and could not come. 0. 7. 8. chikeum karyemyensye taikeui chom porye-hao now while he intends to go you (sir) little he intends to see He intends to go now and wants to see you a little. keu killo kamyensye keu moulken sakeitta that by road while I go that article I will buy I will buy that article as I am going that way. ^ 'l^^ >^l/f ^"^ pyet namyensye pika onta sunshine while proceeds rain comes It rains while the sun is shining. yjit kapheuryemyensye ouei ton keurek'ei sseunanya debt while you intend to pay why money thus do you use ? Why do you spend money in that way if you intend to pay your debts ? ouri kamyensye niaki hapsyeita we while go story let us make Let us chat together as we are going along. keu yak mekeumyensye kot pyengi te hayesso that medicine while he eats directly sickness more has made Directly he took that medicine he got worse. SI 122 COKE AN MANUAL. VIII. — SUFFIX U?;ED WITH VERBS OF FEARINO, ETC, The suffix ^l-A;^, added to the Future Eelative Participle, occurs regularly in connection with verbs expressive of "'fear", like mousy epta and touryepta, or with nounrf expressive of "anxiety" like nyemmje, or Jcekchyeng. Its meaning and use approach nearest to our English conjunction "lest". Exercise XXXTIL 1. v] 6^ ^] 7f 4^). ^v^ 5)JL naiil pika olka nyemnye toio tomorrow rain coming anxiety becomes lam anxious lose it rain tomorrow. •^I^l- ^ ^ 5 -|7f ^^ -s^j, neika keu ttai mot olka kekchyeng hayesso you that time not coming anxiety I made I was anxious lest you could not come then. keu aheui mourei ppachilka toiirycone-hao that child in water falling , afraid-makes The child is afraid of falling into the water. param poulka mousyeouesye haingsven mot hao wind blowing being, afraid navigation not make I cannot sail beintf afraid of the wind blowing. FUTUBE PEBFECT TENSE. A compound tense occurs frequently in Corean which in force and use corresponds practically to our English Future Perfect, "will have" or "would have". It is formed by substituting the agglutinative suffix distinctive of the Future Tense, Jceitta (or k'eitta for aspirated verb stems) for ta final of the Past Tense of the Ordinary Conjugation, and thus presents. a combination of the Past and Future Tenses. It takes various suffixes to express interrogation, condition, etc. in common with the regular tense modifications. The Future Perfect Eela- tive Participle, ending in sil, is generally found joined to choiU (the participle noun ending), ket, thing, etc. in dependence on the verb alia (I know) ; while the termination sillenchi (vide p. 110) most often appears associated with the verb moronta (I know not), and at times has a purely Pluperfect sense: CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. 123 '^ 6^ 7?] "CI- hayetkeitta j I will have done, etc. - ^ ^1 >. hayetkeisso f^^ I would have done, etc. ^ ^ -^ ^ r hayetkeinnanya | "Would I have done, etc. -g. ^ ^1 > hayetkeisso i^r will I have done, etc. "S" ^ >fl >^| ^ hayetkeissini As I would have done, etc. "t ^ 5! ^ °1- 5^ hayetkeittamau \ ^.^^j^ j^^^^ 3„„^_ .jc. _^ *jj ^» ^1 ^y V* hayetkeitchimanan ] ^ ^ ^ hayessil Would have done {Bel: Part:) •g- 6^ >y V^ ^1 hayessillenchi Whether 1 would have done. Exercise XXXIV. yak mekettemyen pyengi nahatkeisso medicine if had eaten sickness will have recovered Had he taken medicine, he would have recovered. 2 J. ^j t\ ^] 51 ^ V 'f keu chip ta chietkeinnanya that house all will have built? Will he have finished building the house ? moksyou oattemyen il ta hayetkeitta carpenter if had come work all ^ will have made Had the carpenter come he would have finished the work. chikeum toraoatkeissini elp'it ka poara now as he will have returned quickly go see He will have returned by now ; go c[uickly and see. 124 COREAN MANUAL. EXEBCISE XXXJV {continued). echei katkeitchimanan iri isse mot kasso yesterday would have gone but work been not went 1 would have gone yesterday but was detained by business. hoitap oassilcboul aiko arapora oasso answer would have come know-and to ascertain came I thought the reply would have come and came to inquire. keu saram pit ta kaphassillenchi nai morokeisso that man debt all whether would have paid I will not know I cannot tell whether he would have paid all the debt. ot ta toiyessilchoul alko nipeura oatta clothes all would have become know-and to dress came I thought the clothes would have been finished and came to put them on. GEBUNDIVE. The Corean verb possesses two allied Gerundives, derived from iHm Future Belative Participle respectively by changing the I final into (1) ra or re or (2) rya or rye. (1) The gerundive in ra or re appears principally in conjunction with the verbs kanta (I go), onta (I come) ^onai^a (I send) and other verbs of motion ; and indicates merely the object for which one comes or goes. With a few verbs, and especially with those marked by Zin the stem, the gerundive is irregularly formed in Ine or Ina, pronounced lie or lla for tlie sake oi euphony. 7]"^^ kachille from kachita (1 fetch). /^ ^ sill© M sitta (I load). kalla „ kalta (I cultiratf). p'alla ,r P'alfca (I sell). CONJUGATION OF \^RBS. 125 Exercise XXXV. 1. sai chapeure kasso ton kapheure oasso birds to seize be went money to pay he has come He has gone shooting. He has come to pay the money. t -fi ^>4 ^^ k'al hana sara oasso knife one to buy has come He came to buy a knife. mal sak naire kasso horse wages to take out he has gone Ha has gone to hire a pony. taikeul chom pora oasso you sir little to see I came I came to see you a little. «^^ ^53 -t^f ^v^ yekeui mouet hara oannanya here what to do have you come ? What have you come here to do? ch'aik sara ponaiyesso book to buy I sent I have sent to buy the book. moulken kacbille ponaiyesso article to fetch he has sent He has sent for the article. yelsoi kachille kasso key to fetch has gone He has gone for the key. 32 126 COREAN MANUAL. 6, Exercise XXXYI. chim chire oasso load to load has ooma He has come for the packages. Bonnim macheure nakasso guests to meet he has gone out He has gone out to meet the guests. ton kachille ponaiyesso money to fetch I have sent I have sent for the money. pat kalla kasso field to cultivate has gone He has gone to plough the fields. mal kachi-ko ssal sille oasso horse take-and rice to load has come He has come with a pony to load the rice. seuikollo k'ong palla kasso to country beans to buy * has gone He has gone to the country to buy beans. chyangei ssal ton-sara kasso to market rice money-to buy he went He is gone to the market to sell the rice. ^i y}^\^ i;d 't^ ^^ chyeoul kachi-ko moulken talla oasso scales bring-and article to weigh came He brought the scales to weigh the articles. « p'alta ordinarily means tx) sell but with grain, rice, etc. it always meanj to buy. CONJUGATION OF VKEBS. 127 (2) The gerundive in rija or rye appears in conjunction with the verb hata (I make), or with the copulative ho (and) generally connecting two inde- pendent clauses. This gerundive always expresses intention or purpos*. 3. Exercise XXXVIL ^7f ^^ ^Ma ^J^j^ ^e|^ naika seuikol karye-ko haingchyang ch'ario I country intend to go-and baggage arrange I am going to the country and am arranging my baggage. onal mouet harye-ko oasso today what intend to do-aud have come ? What have you come for today ? onaremi kongpou chom harya-ko oasso as for today study little intend to do-and have come I came to study a little today. 'd^^l ^l^] y}^ -fy^^ euchei chipei karye hananya when to house intend to go make you ? WTien do you intend to go home? echei chouten ch'aik porya hananya yesterday given book intend to see do you make Do you intend reading the book I gave you yesterday ? i ket mouesai sseurye-ko mantaresso this thing for what intend to use-and have made What do you intend to use this thing for that you have made? nari chyemoure-to karya hananya day late-though intend to go do you make ? Do you mean to go even though it is late ? kapsi pis-ssa-to sarya hao price dear-though intend to buy I make I intend to buy it even though the price is dear. 128 COREAN MANUAL. AUXILIARY VERBS. I. Ota, I come, \ are frequently used in conjunction with the verbal participles Kata, I go, ) of other verbs, to give definiteness and exactness to the meaning. ^^^ ^ J2L Ci-teure-ota M- yr ^^\ na-kata y\yA ^Clkachye-ota 7 ' jd 7 r ^\ kachye-kata ^ Vl ^l C^olla-kata 1^ ^ ^ C4-narye-ota >AL A ^1- sa-ota ^W* 6U ^l* "CI- chapa-kata le-ota 1 enter. I go out. I bring. I take away. I ascend. I descend. I buy. I seize. I summon. II —vota, I see, (a) Joined to the verbal participle of another verb pota conveys the meaning "to try," etc. tl d.i Cltara-pota 1^ 6^ \3f_ "Ci* meke-pota ,£L ^ _2- t^ moure-pota '-g' ti _5. "Cl haye-pota ^ Cl- til Oj- ara-pota ^V^ JL Clch'achye-pota Hun g-see — I weigh . Eaten-see — I taste. Enquired-see — I ask Made-see — I try. Known-see — I enquire. Sought-see — I look-for. (6) preceded by the enchtic particles na and nanka, (substituted for ta final of the Present, Past and Future Tenses, Indicative, of the Ordinary Conjuga- tion) pota expresses probabihty ; Thus— CONJUGATION 0? VERBS. 139 ■ — - — ■ — ■■I'll * — ^ p JS. ^ ha-na pota 1 1 probably do, etc. •S* ^ yV }) w* ha-nanka pota I or I think I do, etc. ^ 5 V --*• > hayen-na pota ( I probably did, etc. -gr ^ Jr 7l- jL 'Cl hayen-nanka pota ) or I think I did, etc. "^ ^ I I haken-na pota 1 1 will probably do, etc. ^ ^^) fe yV _4 ^ hakein-nanka pota ) or I think I will do, etc. (c) With the Future Relative Participle followed by ka, pota is also used to convey the meaning of * "probabil- ity," etc. in the future — "I think I will," etc. S.^ «] -17)- ^^ onal pi ol-ka pota today rain about to come-probable I see I think it will rain today. ^ %1: ^]% ty} Ji^ ken ireul nai-il hal-ka pota that work tomorrow about to do-probable I sea I think 1 will do that work tomorrow. III. — Chouta, I give, is frequently found as an auxiliary joined to the verbal participle of another verb as a complement to its meaning. IV. — Hata, I make, is constantly used as an auxiliary, and especially with such suffixes as teut {tat), likely, man, able, pen, time, etc., when joined to the Futnre Relative Participle of another verb. S3 130 COIIEAN MANUAL. Exercise XXXVTII. 4. '■ ^ 41 ^1 y]t "i^ -^5!4r keu saram choukeul kesal sallye-chouesso that man about to die thing saved life-given I saved that man's Hfe, iri keupha-ni chom toa-chouo work pressing as little assisted-give The work is urgent, so help me a little. '■ J.^ %^^ «]4 -k^ ^^ onal heuryesye pika ol-teut-hata today cloudy rain come-likely-makes It is cloudy today and looks like rain. iri toil-tat-hateni acho t'eullyesso work become-likely-make-but entirely differred The affair looked like succeeding but failed entirely. syoul massi chyoha mekeul-man-hata wine taste good eating-able-makes The wine seems good and quite drinkable. keu pout sseul-man-hata sa-oner& that pen using-able-makes buy-come That pen is quite serviceable ; buy it . ^61] ^\:^ ^ 4 ^ i- ^ '^ mourei ppachye chpukeul-pt^n-hayetta in water fallen into dying-time-made I fell into the water and was nearly drowned. chom te kitaryettemyen mannal-pen-hayesso little more if I had waited meeting-time-made I would have met him had I waited a little more. 5. 7. 8. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. l.jl NEGATION. To express negation Coreans commonly employ one of the two follov/ing ivords- L. 6Lor ^\ Vl an or afii, signifying either mere negation, or «oi with the im- plied sense of unwillingness. [I. JSL mot, signifying not, with, the implied sense of inabihty. [II. Yet a third method of expressing negation consists in dropping the final ta of the Present Indicative of the Ordinary Conjugation and adding to the root of the verb one of the following terminations : — (a) ^1 6L ^^or>X|- ^c/ziawjS'a or chant' a. This termination, which becomes ^1 6L ^4.or JcU ■B^.c/i'ian^'a or ch'anVa for aspirated roots, is properly a contraction for-^j or^j chi or ch'i (the negative infinitive sign) combined vidth the words 61. V| "^ "C^anihata, not make. It is used chiefly with verbal adjectives, Thus — Jg. e|.cVra,good: ja^l <>}^^.,uy,,j,^,^,,t^^] ,,ot good, ^ ^L ^\, chyoch'ant'a j i.e. bad. y^ v^ F y ■ yy >^| J- "C^ kipchiant'a { not deep, TI >^I- ^4» kipchant'a \ i.e. shallow, (b) ^1 ^ ^ Cl — chi viot hata-, expressive of inabihty (cannot). J ^ r H '^ ^ — c/iianiAa^a, expressive of unwilhngness (will not). (c) ^] ^^ JL —chimalko ^\ _^i ^1 expressing prohibition (do not). >| ol ^ _^^^ ^^^ ) ^ 182 COEEAN MANUAL. Exercise XXXIX. ^ 6]. t^ 41 Rvoul an mekso wine not I drink I do not drink wine. 3. pyello chyoba am in particular good not 1 do not care much for it oj-v) -f^ hao make .) «^ 1 this ttai time kkachi pobaingkoun ani teure-oasso until courier not entered-came The courier has not arrived as vet. 1 syoiil mot mekso wine not I drink I cannot drink wine. "^ ± 5:4 *H chyoha good am not hao make I do not care for it. tampai tobacco onal today pika 5V ^ I'i" *i 1 ^«f 5 mat koiakhaye mot mekkeitta taste being wicked not will eat The tobacco is bad and I cannot smoke it. t"] 51^1^ 7M) 5 iri issesye ka-chi mot work having been to go not I am busy today and cannot go. ram ol-teut-haye ka-chi ani coming-likely-made to go not It looks like rain and I will not go. hao make hao make Hl^f ^ ^^15: ^^1 *)-H -f^ naika ton isse-to chou-chi ani hao I money having-though to go not make Even though I have money I will not give you any. naiil tomorrow 6^61 m manheu-ni neutkei o-chi work many-as late to come We will be busy tomorrow so do not be late. mara avoid CONJUGATION OF \^RBS. 133 THE DEMONSTRATIVE VERB. The English verb "to be" is represented in Corean by two distinct words, each with a use and meaning essentially its own. The Corean verb ^f "Cv itta (root 6| U) implies "possession", and corresponds to "have"; whereas ^ Ci-^V^a (root 6l i or ^ il) has a purely demonstrative force and appears only in the third person, singular or plural, appended as a suffix or agglutination to the noun of which it predicates. Thus k'al itta means "there is a knife", i.e. "I have a knife" ; but k'al iltci implies that "it is a knife' [not any other article or instrument] . In short, ilta mav well be defined as the demonstrative verb. Present, tense. Imperfect tense. Interrogative. ilta ita ira io yo iteni ilteni illeni inya inka io yo rHe, she, it is : they are. He, she, it is : they are (polite form)- He, she, it was, : they were. lis it? etc. s 1 J }-Isit? etc (polite). ^i'C^^ iltenya 1 -a v) v^ illenva J ^\N'a8 it? etc. 31 134 COEEAN MANUAL. Conditional. ^W imyen If it be, etc. irato ina 1 [-Though it be, etc. ^d^l inchi Whether it be, etc. t^] ilchi ,, it will be, oto ''U^] itenchi „ it was, etc. Ex itencbi illenchi - Whether it be, etc. ERCI8E XL. 2. 3. 5. keu that keu that chipi nai chip house my house That is my house. o^6| man n ch'am mal speeck true speech Is that the truth? ilta ift i o|v> mva i^? 7)5 kechat false t 11: "] ^ mal an speech not It is not a lie. ita is taiki »>^ ^} ■% a anan saram you (sir) knowing man Is the man known to you? 1-i 10 ii? ^] ^ ^vla yei yes nai chinko my friend Yes he is my friend. yo in 2. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 185 EXERCISE XL {continued). ^ ^ ^ ^ ''l^'^ keu cbyeii k'eun chyen ilteriya that shop big shop was? Was that a big shop ? chyenei-uan koiakhai saram iteni formerly-aB for wicked man was but Formerly he was a bad man ; chikcnm-enn keurechi anso * now-as for thus not is But he is not so now. Exercise XLI. t4 4^ 1- *!. 4s. mareun orheun mal irato as for speech right speech though it be Though what you say is quite correct. ireun keurek'ei toil sou epso as for work thus becoming means is not The affair cannot be arranged in that wav. k'ong ma ssal ina kapsi match'ankachi beans -vrhether be rice whether be price much the same Whether beans or rice, the price is much the same. i chip inchi chye chip inchi morokeisso this house whether be that house whether be I will not know I cannot tell which house it is. » thus not IS. Contracted for keure-chi-an-so, the polite form of keure-chi-an-iia 136 COREAN MANUAL. 6. EXEBCISE XLI (continued). noukou-nya who is ? Who is there ? 4 a (/br-inya) f ch'inko yo friend it is It is friend. t3 mousam kesi-o ifor-io) what thing is it "? What is it? ^i'^ namou-lta (/br-ilta) wood it is It is wood. so-tenchi mari-tenchi toiiian tairo chapa onera ox-whethcr be horse-whether be becoming according to seize come Get horses or bullocks just as you can. VERBAL NOUNS. Verbal nouns are of two categories : — (I) Those derived from the verb stem by adding m and kl. Nouns in m are regarded as abstract, like the English words love, play, etc, whereas" those in ki are participial, equivalent to the English loving, playing, etc. Both forms are modified for case inflexion. The noun in ki retains its use and force as a verb in governing an object, and at times it is best rendered by an infinitive, especially with adjectives like chyot'a (good) souipta (easy) eryepta (diflicult), etc. Its use in the Oppositive Case appears principally in connection with verbs modified by the conjunctional agglutinations manan, tc, tai, nioa-^ as explained on page 100. 1 -f 7| 4 -i7l ham haki pom poki action acting ) From hata (I make). sight seeing From pota (I see). \ N. B. — For the sake of euphony, the initial i of ilta (and its various modifications) is regularly dropped when the word to which it is appended as a suffix ends in an open vowel sound. This is especially the case with the nomina- tive case ending in t. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 137 ^ 13 param JL7] >^7] hope hoping •From parata (I hope). cham chaki om oki kam kaki VFrom ckata (I sleep), sleeping j arrival ) SFrom o coming ta (I come). departure )^^^^ ^^^^ ^j going (II) Those derived from Relative Participles by adding the suffix choul. This suffix, modified for the instrumental case into choullo and then best rendered by the preposition for, is found only with such verbs as alta, I know,, moronta, I know not, nekita, I think, chimchakhata, I suppose, etc. At times — especially when found with the Future Participle, — hoto followed by the Infinitive conveys the nearest approximation to its use and meaning in English. Exercise XLTI. 1. 2. 4 y}y] H^^ f -t7] ^J^ kii kaki eryepta mal haki souipta road going is difficult speech making IS easy The road is difficult to go. It is easy to speak. >1 JL 7) s 4 t -f 7] ^ "^1 4 san poki chyot'a hill seeing is good The hill is pretty to look at. il haki tetaita work making is slow The work is slow in being done. i 4. chip house echei yesterday S.^}^ s44^ ^i^} 3144 chyok'inan chyot'amanan kapsi as for goodness is good but . price The house, I admit, is good but the price is dear. ^J-'H] ^} t 4 ^ pamei . cham han cham mot in night sleep one sleep not I could not sleep at all last night. pis-ssata is dear chasso I slept 35 138 COREAN MANUAL. Exercise XLIII. 1. il hananchoul molla il halchoul moUa work making I know not work making I know not I did not know he was engaged on the work. I do not know how to do the work keul sseulchoul ara keu saram chyoheunchoullo ara letter writing know you ? that man for good I know Do you know how to write. I took him for a good man. keu pai naiil olchoullo nekio that boat tomorrow coming I think I think the ship will come tomorrow. keuri toilchoureun chimchak mot hayesao thus as for becoming suppose not I made I never supposed that it would result in this way. keu chikeikoun oattenchoul molla that packmen came I know not I did not know that the pack coolie had come. 6. keu kyeichip neulkeunchoullo arasso that woman for old I know I took her for an old woman. choung-nom choukeunchoul arasso piiest-fellow dead I know I thought the priest had died. pyello chyoheuncboul morokeisao Bpecially good 1 will not know I do not think it particularly good. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 13D In addition to those above mentioned, other Verbal Nouns are supplied by appending the suffixes >y chil and Jj^ ^ iiorat, signifying respectively action and professioii or business, to the root forms of certain nouns, as seen in the following e-camples. Exercise XLIV. 1. ^ tochek-chil hanta thief-action I make I steal. 1^4 ^a yekchek-chil rebel-action I rebel. hanta I make 2. :^^]^l t^ kcllei-chil hanta duster-action I make I dust. ^^l 8ol-chil hanta brush-action I make I brush. 4. pana-chil hanta needle-action I make I sew. >}3. M i -^^i pouch'ai-chil hanta fan-action I make I fan. Jcf *g>fe ^ 3^ t ^ amo norat to hal ket epso any business even making thing is not There is no profession at all open to me. sakoung-norat orai hayesso sailor-business long I made I have long been a sailor. ^^^1 ^>fcjcl 5. t^vfe -fa p'csyou-norat hako kounsa-norat to hunter-business and soldier-business also I have been both hunter and soldier. hayesso I mad» 140 COKEAN MANUAL. . ADVERBS DERIVED FROM VERBS AND ADJECTIVES. Adverbs derived from Verbs and Adjectives are usually formed by substituting kei for ta (or k'ei for t'a) final of the Present Tense of the Ordinary Conjugation: — ^y^] okei from ^^ onta, I come. ^yy^] kakei »» ^}^ kanta, I go. t^) yelkei >t "i^ yelta, I open. ^^1 hyok'ei )( s^ chyot'a I am good These Adverbs are generally followed by such verbs as hata, I make, or toita, I become, and are causative in sense, equivalent to the English so as to, so that, in order that, with the use and force of a Future Infinitive. Those derived from Adjectives very frequently end in i, (or hi where the root is marked by an aspirate). Exercise XLY. 1. ^ tA ^6^4 5 -t^i] -t^fsf moun yelkei hayera mot hakei hayera door so as .to open make not so as to make make Make the door to open. See that he does not do that. chal hakei hayera well 80 as to do make See that you do this well. eumsik talkei toiyesso food so as to be sweet has become The food has been sweetened. 3. ^^ 'i^] 3!-^] 5|^4: 31 pap ipei matkei toiyesso rice to mouth so as to meet has become The rice has been cooked to suit my taste. syoul chyok'ei haye nehera wine so as to be good having made place Make the wine good and store it away. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 141 4. Exercise XLYI. ^ ^^1 3J:7)JL ton mopsi atkio money bad cherishes He is stingy ■:\ith his money. ton man chyonnghi nekio money only heavily he thinks He cares for nothing but money. -f-t ^J^l 44 oumoul kiphi p'ara well deeply dig Dig the well deep. i p'aimoul kopkei touera this cmrio neatly place Put this curio carefully away. ^ ^Vll 44''] '4*1-^ kea sarameul poulsyangi nekio that man piteously he thinks He pities that man. a 7^1/3^ a 4 ^*|^ keu kyeichipeul chyohi nekio Oman good He is fond of that woman. that woman good he thinks keu kyeichipeul chyohoa * hanta that woman good he makes He is fond of that woman. * chyohoa is a pecuHar Verbal Participle derived from chyot'a I am good, occuring only in the phrase chyohoa-hanta meaning "I love". 86 142 COKEAN MANUAL. CAUSATIVE AND PASSIVE VEBBS, Instead of Active and Passive Voices, the Corean language possesses a convenient system of word construction producing a causative meaning and hence aptly termed "causative" construction. It consists in the insertion of the vowel sounds i, hi and on according to the requirements of Corean euphony, before ta final of the verb stem as seen in the Present Tense of the Ordinary Conjugation. The meaning of the verb alone is changed, and the conjugation remains un- affected, the whole being treated as an iadspsudent verb. Active verbs are thui rendered passive in sense and vice versa. Thus jnalda (I hinder) becomes mak- hita (I cause to binder, I am hindered) ; chouhta (I die) becomes ckoukita (I cause to die, I kill) ; khaita (I am awake) becomes kkaiouta (I cause to wake, I awaken). Such at least is the general principle pervading the language but in many words an allied active sense is produced adding to the expressiveness of the Corean vocabulary. Thus mekta (I eat) passes into viekita (I cause to eat, I feed) ; Vata (I ride) into t'ahita (I cause to ride, I mount). A great claes of verbs possessing this "causative" formation, have their verb stem ending in I and with such words Corean euphony requires ni to be inserted between the stem and ta final of the Present Tense. Thus salta (I live) becomes 6al-nita, read sallita (I cause to live, I save life) ; molta (I drive) heGomes inol-nita , read mollita (I am driven). Exercise XLVTI. 1. t X^ ^ "^^^^ mal pori chom mekyera horse barley a little feed Give the pony a little barley to eat. tocheknom mok peiye choukyesso thief Beck having cut he killed He beheaded the thief. mal anchang chiouera na etai kakeitta horse saddle load I where will go Saddle the pony — I am going out. kangei ereum ta nokyesso in river ice all was melted The ice in the river has all melted- 5. 6. CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. 143 EXERCISE XL VII {continued). ^4 ^'l *'>-i "l^"'] ^1^4 nareul naiil ach'am ilcheuki kkaiouera me tomorrow morning early waken Waken me early tomorrow morning. chal mot hayesso sallye-chousio well not I have made saved life give please I have done wrong ; pray forgive me. '■ ^^}^] 5] *H -2.4 M| <^ ef tongsanei toiachi mora naiyera from garden pig driven expel Drive tlie pigs out of the garden. toiachi ta moliye nakasso pig all been driven have gone out The pigs have all been driven out. MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMATIC USES OF THE VEBB. (1) The Relative Participles, Present, Past and Future, are frequently found used idiomatically with the suffixes Cj '^.tairo, tiL .^'mank'eum, etc., with a sense equivalent to the English as is the custom, as is proper, as you like, etc. (2) One of the commonest idioms of the (!orea,n language is that which consists in appending to the Present and Future Eelative Participles of the verb suffixes expressive o^ various forms of action, possibility, probability etc. Of these forms some of the most important are here given for convenience of reference, appended exempli gratia to the common verb hata, though they may of course be used with any other verb. ^ ^ S^ ^ CL hanan-teut-hata "^S \^ ^ IS" ^H hanan-tat-hata "1 ^ ^ ^ hal-teut-hata [j ^^ ^^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^ I am probably doing, etc. hal-tat-hata ) |5-t4 ^ u|. -gr pL hal-man-hata I am capable of doing, etc. ■^ \rt ^ "Cl hal-pen-hata I am on the point of doing, etc. -g" V V^ ^ "Clhanan-ch'yei-hata I am pretending to do, etc. 144 COREAN MANUAL. 1^ hal-ch'yei-liata hal-ppoun-ilta hanan-tai hal-tai hanan-ttai hal-ttai hal-sai hal-chei hal-chek hanan-t*e I will pretend to do, etc. It is merely this he is doing. Since I am making. Since I will make. Time of doing (present). Time or period of doing, (future). J /The position, duty or power to do. hal-t'e ' Many of these suffixes likewise occur with the Past Kelative Participle, but their use and mining can easily be seen from the above given examples of their use with the Present and Future Participles. <3) In addition to the use of the gerundive in rya or rye (see page 127) to express intention, two new combinations are formed by adding kochya- hata (or kockye-hata) and kosipouta to the verb stem. Thus with the verb hata for an example again, we get — I intend to do, etc. ^ "^ y(^ -g* "Cl ha-kochyahata ^ JJ7 y^ "S" ^ ha-kochyehata - ^ >% l^ ^i ha-kosipouta 1 propose to do, etc. I desire to do, I would like to do, etc. <4) The suffix mcheuh hata expresses the meaning of it is pleasant, worthy, capable or possible and is joined to the Verbal Participle by a connecting vowel a or e according to the requirements of euphony. {N. B.—Chak is found in use at times for cheuk). «^ 6^: ^ -^ "pL haya-mcheuk hata J^ 0^ ^ -g" Cl haye-mcheuk hata \J 6i ^ ^ XX poa-mcheuk hata t^ 6j -^ '^ "Cl- meke-mcheuk hata -It is pleasant to do. It is pleasant to see. It is pleascnt to eat. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 145 (5) The suflfix chi added to the verb stem produces a variety of meanings: of which the two most important are — (a) "S" ^j hachi yX. ^] kachi \jf JM pochi etc. etc. to make to go to see etc. An Infinitive regularly used in „ forming negation (g.t?. pages 131, ri32), and especially with tlie verb [ mar a, malko. ) (b) -S" ^j hachi ^ ^1 ochi Used both interrogatively and affirmatively for all persona singular and plural. do I make ? etc. I do make, etc. do I come ? etc I come, etc. etc. (C) There are two special forms of the Future Tense with which the student would do well to familiarise himself, occurring frequently aa they do ia Corean colloquial: — etc. (a) -^ ^ Ct harita "f ^ ^ Cl haorita (b) ^U} hama \ Used for the first and third persons singular and plural. They are polite }- forms used by inferiors to superiora or by equals towards each other for the j sake of courtesy. ] Restricted to the first person in connec- [ tion with the indirect speech {oratio }obliqua) and generally followed by the ) enclitic ko marking it accordingly. ^ ^ % , , "II made or I said, etc., CO "^ 'C^ ^ ^ ^^* h bad made or I had said. etc.. an Imperfect or Pluperfect tense for all persons— used generally in closing a sentence or with ko in the indirect speech. (8) ^ ^ ^ hateran a Relative Participle formation derived from the above— fiawi or woflfe. 37 146 COEEAN MASn^UAL. Exercise XLYIII. sakton nam chounan tairo chouera wages others giving Pay the same r according to give wages as others give. sakton chouten tairo chouera wages given Give the according to regular wages. give 4-£ sakton choul ^]3. tairo chouera wages about to give according to give Give the proper wages. 4-^ 4-^ ^ ua sakton choul mank'eum wag23 about to give size give Give the proper rate of wages. chouera h&ten made according to Do as you did before. chyenei before tairo -f *i4 hayera make yak medicine H^l '^'d '^13. ^H^f echei mekten tairo mekera yesterday eaten according to eat Take the medicine as you did yesterday. 4 y} kil road kanan tairo going according to Gro as tax as you like. 4^1 ef kakera go GONJUGATION OF YEBBS. 147 5. Exercise XLIX. moksyou pouUe il sikil tairo sikyera carpenter call work about to order according to order Call the carpenter and tell him to do what you like. ^ 4i& ^[3. ^ef ton sseunan tairo SBera money uaincj according to use Use the money as required. ton sseul tairo sseuo money about to use according to use Use the money as you like. ton ne sseul mank'eum kachye-kakexa money you about to use size taken-go Take away whatever money you want. toinan tairo amorik'ena haycra becoming according to any way whatever make Do it any way that it c£|.n be done. chei oma hanta chei omako hanta himself will come he says himself will come he says He says he will come himself. ^] ^J= **] -t ^d *H ^1 "4 ^ 1 -f «f 3t -f ^ ef michyangi haten ireul naiil p'iryek hamako • hatera mason made work to-morrow finish will make he said The ra.ason said he would finish the work he was doing, tomorrow. 148 COREIN MANUAL. ADYERBS. In addition to the Adverbs derived from Verbs and Adjectives, referred to on page 140, the Coreau language also possesses a large number of Adverbs proper, which in common with the others qualify and precede the Verb or Adjective, and are not subject to inflexion, except occasionally when two ideas are placed in contrast by means of the Oppositive Case suffix in eun, an, etc. A few Adverbs appear with the Locative or Instrumental case endings in ei, eisye, euro, TO, etc, but the sense is purely adverbial and all signification of case inflexion is practically absent from the mind of the speaker. Some of the more common Adverbs of time, place, manner, degree, etc. are here appended for convenience of reference: — (1) TIME. JuBt now. As yet. Entirely. Already. Karly. By and by. Long time. In a short time. In this year. Always. Afterwards Continually Directly. *V4 akka * 6].>) achik *U acho *JS] imeui %^ ilcheuk 51^'^ ittaka * s.^ oral XA^\ tX- Vb oraichianya ^^ orei t^^ hangsyang ^^1 houei A^ kakkeum ^ kot y,% match* am i^Ml match 'amnai J-Finally. ♦ These two Adverbs are only used with reference to past and future hours on the day of speaking, not to preceding and subsequent days. ADVERBS. 149 5:5: ^^) For special adverbs referring to the day, pp 54, 55. A few others are here appended — ach'amei mm monchye neutkei palsye sipang soui taeum tasi tora toro chamkkan chacho chyeptai chyenei cheuksi chikeum 38 ») ^ <>\] it'eunnal nachai nathouei ohouei pamei saipyekei sikchyenei Beforehaad. Formerly. Late. Already. At present - Soon. Next. Again. >Back again. Moment. Often. The other day. Before. Instantly. NoAy. the month, the. year, etc., see In the early morning. Next day. At noon. vin the afternoon. i At night. At day break. In the forenoon. 150 CORE AN MANUAL. (3) PLACE. "m ftiiheui i '(Inside. "1^3. anheuro ) 1^^ apheui , In front. 1}J:^ apheuro ) <»|-?j] arai Below. <^ ^] etai ■N H'^U etairo 1 o]<\^ ^taisye ) ^J] yekeui (statior-arj') ^'Here. o]z] iri (motion) 1 ^6,) oiei Outside. -^^1 ouei Above. ^71] katkai ??ear. 7]^ kekeui There. ^^ kenne Across . °f^ macho Vis-a-vis, face to face. ^H melli Far. vi«f neme Across. 3^^ patkeui Outside. ^^ pekeum Secondly. ^6,) sokei Inside. -There. J ^^ cbyekeui (stationary) c^a| chyen (motion) ^l"'! touiei Beliiiid. AD^^BBS. 151 (3) MANNEB. 6|.of ama Probably. *> JL effi) amorak'ei r In any way whatever. oj-i^-^^ ^ ■ amorik'ena 1 1 1^)5. ekchiro Forcibly. 'i^ elleun ) ^Quickly. H^ esye ) ^^1 etchi 'How. 5!^^l ettek'ei ^^^3. imeuiro Freely. ^M iri >In this manner. «•) ^fi] irek'ei ! ^] ouei. Why? ^'d^] ouyeni By chance. -Together. 1^ hamkkeai t^f^U hankachiro J t^*^! hankepei At once. -7 °^o] kamani Quietly. katch'i Similarly. keurek'ei -Thus. a^l keuri li^>^] pantasi Assuredly. ^^] patpi Quickly. ^JC pyello Specially. ^"^1 pontai Originally. ^^1 syokhi Speedily. 162 COKEAN MANUAL. ^>*5. seusaro Naturally. -£J2.>) tomochi Altogether. ^/^pj chasyeihi Carefully. ^^0] ch'yench'yeni Slowly. ^ dial Well. ^^'•1 chayeni Naturally. ^'^l chyenei Formerly. ^ic chyello Instinctiyely. 4 A5. ch'ameuro 1 ^ Truly. 1 ^i^^ chinsillo rBy degrees. J^^ ch'ach'a 'i'l chyem chyem (4) DEGBEE. ^ y\^} kacliang -Exceedingly. j 4^1 koahi J "i man Only. ^1-1^ maiou Very. manhi Many. moto Altogether. A^ neme -Too (much). v|^ nemou >t4 sarok ^-% teok - More. ^4 torok t'orok J:4 choin ^ Little. a:-^ chokom J POSTPOSITIONS 153 (5) NEGATION AND AFFIRMATION. 11 an I *H ani --No. ^ mot ./ ^ yei ) 44 olt'a Yes. 1 4/^1 cf olsyeita / a ^ 4 keiiret'a Yes (it if? so). ae| ^1 11:4 keurech'iant'a "No (it is not 8o). a e^ ^1 It 4: keurech'ianso J An, ani and mot are the regular verbal negatives (see page 131). An, ani express mere negation, but 7not in addition to negation expresses inability. Yei is the usual affirmative for yes ; oWa is properly a Corean verb it is correct, right, etc. — olsyeita being its polite or honorific fonn. KeureVa is a verbal construction derived from keure (thus) ; keurech'iant'a is the negative combination (see page 135), and is modified into Keurech'ianso as the polite or honorific form. POSTPOSITIONS. In addition to the various inflexions of the Noun to indicate case relation, the Corean language possesses a series of words performing functions similar to Prepositions in European languages. In Corean however they appear after the Noun or Pronoun they govern and hence are properly designated Post- positions. They do not necessarily modify the Noun they govern as regards case, with the exception of a very few Postpositions which are found associated with certain case agglutinations. As a general rule the Postposition may be treated as an Adverb in its use — the Noun remaining uninflected as in the root. Some of the more common Postpositions are here appended : — 6L ^^1 ant'ei To : by ; {substitute for dative) ^1 ^ ^c inhaya Because of {fjovems instrumental ^— '' r cusative). ^1 -g' 61; ouihaya For the iiakcoi {(joverns accusative). 164 COREAN MANUAL. 77^] kkachi Until. Jie^ peut'e From -44 pota i Than JL'^ patem ( -^MI taisin Instead of •c.^ tar3'e To ^ Ji^ tepoure With. (governs instrumental or ab- lative) . (used in comparison of ad- jectives) . (substitute for dative). CONJUNCTIONS. The Conjunction proper appears in Corean as part of the regular vorb modification for conjugation — see pages 101, 102. But a few words are likewise used independently, connecting or introducing the clauses of a sentence, — chiefly however in the written and but seldom in the spoken language. The more common of these independent Conjunctions are : — -^ achik ochik ohirye hameulmye hok keurena manil pirok tto ttehan Yet. Bur. Still. P'urther. Perhaps. Nevertheless. If. Although. ' Further. The conjunction and is variously rendered :— (I) Between nouns, by oa when the noun to which it is subjoined as a suffix ends in an open vowel sound, and by koa for a closed consonant. Hako may be used equally for an open vowel or closed consonant sound. (II) With verbs and adjectives, and is formed by ko snh.qtituted for the ta final of the Present Tense in the Ordinary Conjugation. CONJUNCTIONS. 155 Exercise L. 4 4 44 ^ 3iv^ ch'a oa ch'atcnyong ta innanya tea and tea-cup all are? Have you got tea and teacups ready ? 2. 6)) ^ yei 5£ *J it 4 t4 syoul koa syoui-chan tto isso wine and wine-cups also are Yes ; and also wine and wine glasses. ir^-k'ei thus taichyepeul hasini enterta'inment make-because Thanks for your kind reception. -n o '}^ komapso thanks dt 4 177|) c^ >^Hef • 80 oa maikkei ta sirera bull and on pony all load Load both the bullocks and the horses. t^ ^> ^>fc ^ 4 ^^ pout koa chyoheui ta sa pen and paper all buy I have bought both pens and paper. oasso come ^ ^} a chye saram that man hako and He and ^ hako and na I I will go together. katch'i tosether kakeitta will go syoul pout-ko ch'a kachye-onera wine pour-and tea . bring-come Pour out the wine and bring the tea. 156 €OEEAN MANUAL. EXERCISE L {continued). 9. 10. onareun kongpou-ha-ko naiireun koukyeng-kao as for today study-make-and as for tomorrow picnic-go Study today and go for a picnic tomorrow. JL 7} ^]-f- ^3. 7jt^ keu kang maiou nelp-ko kipta that river very broad-and ■ is deep That river is very broad and deep. »1 J-3. 11?| S.^^ f^ ^IJL pi o-ko ilkeui chyoheumyen p'oung-Tiyen * io rain come-ond weather if be good plenty-year is With rain and good weather there will be full crops. INDIRECT HPEECH. (OB ATI OBLIQU-A) To the student, no part of the Corciin language presentii greater difficulty than the correct rendering of the connecting particle required in indirect spoech with the verb hanta {mal lianta) I speak, etc. The rule is that the subordinate noun clause is regularly constructed in the Ordinary Conjugation, ending in ta ra, etc ; the euphonic and enclitic particle ko (which otherwise possesses no in- dependent meaning or use) is then added as a suffix to the verb closing this noun clause ; and finally comes hatita (I speak or say) completing the sentence. "Besides Ao as the enclitic connective, hako is also employed for the same purpose, but much less frequently. In continuous colloquial speech, instead of actually inserting the verb hanta, I speak, ko or hako may be used alone, as they are sufficient to indicate the part of the phrase or sentence in the oratioobliqua, and may be translated accordingly I say that, he says that, etc. Tliese enclitics ko or hako must be carefully distinguished from the two copulative conjunctions ko and hako used for and. Ko and hako followed by the verb hanta (I speak) serve to mark the end of the clause in the oratio ohliqua, and in meaning cor- respond with our Ea:^lish conjunction i/wi— either expressed or understood — with the verbs to say, tell, speak, etc. * From two C'liinesc derivatives meaning plenty and y^nr. INDIEECT SPEECH. 157 1. Exercise LT. ^^I^f jSL°f t^ cheika oma hanta self will come he says He says he will come o?' He promises to come cheika oma-ko hanta self will-come he says He says he will come. ^^14 -^^^^ t^ cheika okeitta-ko hanta self will come he says He says he will come. cheika orye-ko hanta self intends to come he says He says he intends to come. cheika keu ttai oatta-ko hanta self that time came he says He says he came at that time. ton choukeitta-ko hanta money will give he says He says he will give the money. pit naiil kapheumako hanta debt tomorrow will pay he says He says he will pay the debt tomorrow. echei chipei katta-oattako hanta yesterday to house went-came he says He says he went home yesterday. 40 lo« COREAN MANUAL. BXEKCISE LII. 1 vi Jr S 4 a -? ^1 ^ ^ ^ 4 nenan chyot'ako hatai nanan seult'a as for you good is though say as for me refuse Though you say it is gO'.)d I do not want it. 'z 4 x^. ^ =1 a|. ^ t^f 5 6] fe cf a ef c|. jI t^ nanan olch'imanan tarani-nan ta keuratako hanta as for me am right but as for otlxers all am wrong say I am right but every body else says I am wrong. nai chipei ittako nameuikei mal hachi mara I in house am to otheas speech to make arvid Don't tell any one that I am at home. * -^ ^ 4 7j 4 <^| <^ ^ v| H] t^^X t ^ 4 onareun kyereuri epsani naiil orako * hayera as for today leisure as is not tomorrow to come say I have no time today : tell him to come tomorrow. echei pyengi issesye mot oattako hanta yesterday sickness been not have come says He says he could not come- as he was sick yesterday. euiouen mari yak mekeumyen natkeittako hanta doctor's speech medicine if eat will recover says The doctor says he v.'ill get well if he will take the medicine. ZL ^l^ -f-61] ^^ 5^ ^ JL *)- 6}: t ^ '^:il t ^ keu ireul ouei aroiye poaya alkeittako hanta that affair above i.e. the King reported if only see will know says He says he will only know by memorializing the King. keuri mot Lfmyni k'eun naugp'ai toikeittako hanta thus not i ' make great disaster will become says He says thcie will be serious loss unless he can act thus. * Orako is derived from tho gerundive in ra (or re) with ko as the enclitic connective with hania, I say. 7. INDIKEGT SPEECH. 169 Exercise LIIL 2. 3. ^^1 ^^^^ t^^f^ ^^l ^"^ ^^ chei eronsiD.ci alleunta-ko euiouen pora kasao oneself fathsr is Rick-(says) doctor to see has gone He says his father is sick and he has gone to see the doctor. sonnim oatta-ko syoiil sara kasso guest has come- (says) wine to buy has gone He says guests have come and he has gone to buy wine. P3'eng kotch'ikeitta-I.o pon koukeuro torakasso sickness he will cure-(5ays) native to c;-untry has returned He says he will cure hi illujess and has returned to his country. chim ta ponaiyetta-ii:o naikei p'yenchi hayesso load all has sent- (says) to me letter has made He has written to say that he sent all the baggage. kasye p'alla-ko haye-poara * having gone to sell- (enclitic) having made-see Go and see if he will sell. nai keuri hatera-ko nameuikei mal mara I thus said-(^;ays) toothers speech avoid Do not tell any one that I said so. ' p»| i: ^} 3. i-'t S.^2^JL t^ nei mal tairo hamyen chyok'eitta-ko hanta your speech according to if he does it will be good he says He says it Vvili be all right if he acts as you say. i keurat sseuki cbyot*a-ko te sa-ora-ko hanta this basin using isgood-(says) more buy-to-come- says He says the basin is useful and bids you buy some more. 6. * haye-pota means to try ; ko preceding haye is euphonic and palla the gerundive. 160 COREAN MANUAL. THE DOUBLE IMPERATIVE. While ko, the enclitic connective, can appear even without hanta (I say, speak, etc.), and thus marks the close of the part of the phrase or sentence con- taining the indirect speech, ko itself, when preceded by a gerund of a verb and followed by the imperative hay era (say etc.,) is likewise dropped, and by elision and contraction a new combination is formed in aira. Thus ora-ko hayera becomes ora-hayera (to come-say), which again is further modified into or-aira, with a double imperative sense meaning — tell him to come, order him to come, etc. % a. EjKFJicisE JAY. pohaingkoun naiii ilcheuki oraira courier tomorrow early tell to come Tell the courier to come early tomorrow. ^mokounkoun il pouchareni haraira coolies work diligently tell to make Tell the coolies to be diligent. kyokounkoun syoul chom mekeuraira chair coolies wine little tell to eat Tell the chair bearers to drink a little wine. elleuii pap chieuraira naika etai kakeitta quickly rice tell to cook I somewhere will go Tell him to get dinner ready soon ; I am going out. hain tarye * pang chyenghi sseullaira * servant to (postpos.) room cleanly tell to sweep Tell the servant to sweep the room clean. sseullaira from sseulla the gerund oisseulta, (see gerundive page 124), ADDITIONAL EXEECTSES. 41 162 COREAN MANUAL 3. Exercise 1. oumouri maiou kipso well very deep The well is very deep. ettek'ei mantalkeisso how will make How do you want it made? ^ 5|7l 1 ^4-^ chal toikiral parao well becoming I expect I expect it well made. i ket mouesai sseukeisso this thing for what will use What do you use this for? elmana kouhao how many desire How many do you want? chokom man tallahao little only demand I only want a little. sikinan tairo hayera ordering according make Do as you are told. pf-i tj] ^^] *J>fe taran tai sseultai epso another place use is not It is of no other use. 6. 6. EXERCISES. 163 EXEBCISE 1 (continued). 10. IL ^1 ouei why ^V^ neutkei oannanya late have come "Why^are you late. onareun pyello neutchiant'a to-day particularly late not is I am not very late to-day. i mal ch'eeumeuro teuresso this speech for first time I heard I heard this for the first time. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. ^ t i ^i^ ^1 JL ta han moyangio all one kind is They are all fo one kind. 43^4 ^71) 4^] ^io} charireul k'eukei chapchi malla mat largely to seize avoid Don't take up so much space. i pang neme chyopta this room too small The room is too small. nanan etai ancheura as for me where to sit Where am I to sit ? hao make >H iren this ket naika kouhanan thing I seeking This is what I want. kesio article is 164 COEEAN ll^IANUAL. Exercise 2 1 0] y]A] zt ?X 3\. ^4^J:4 i kesi keu ket koa katchiant'a this thing that thing with not ahke These two things are different. 2. yekeui amo ket to epso here a'ny thing ever not is There is nothing here whatever. him sse have poara strength use make see Try j'our utmost and see. 4 °| ^ -7 e ^) 7j| >k mal chal karach'ikeisso speech well will teach I will teach you to speak well. patheui p'oul maiyera field's weeds weed Weed the field. tongsanei namou simera garden v/ood sow Plant trees in the garden. matangeul chyenghi sseurera compound clean sweep Sweep the court clean. ton chom kkouye chouo money little having lent give Lend me a little money. 6. 8. EXEKCISES. 165 9. EXEBCISE 2 {continued). ^^J 4*^1 ^^ keunsim chyoiingei isso anxiety in midst is I am in trouble. aronch'yei malko interfering avoid Don't interfere. naikei koankyeich'iant'a to me no concern is It does not matter to me. 10. 12. 13. keu sarameun * pouchya yo that man rich is He is a rich man. *! ^^-1 5l/| t^ i mareul mitchi malko this speech to trust avoid Don't believe that talk. kil maiou nelpta road very broad is The road is very broad. ^*) <*|-1*} ^^± taiki atari myetch'io sir sons how many are How many children have you ? 10. 6].^ ^ 4 ^ -^vf. ^6J41 atal toul koa ttal hana touesso sons two and daughter one placed I have two sons and one daughter. * Oppositive case. 42 15. 166 COEEAN MANUAL. 4. S. Exercise 3. 4^1 t t'ongei moul in tub • water Pour water pouera pour in the tub. il anan sarameul ponaio work knowing man send Send somebody who knows the work. ^ 7M) ^3L ^>k tou kachi yenko isso two kinds reason are Ther« are two reasons for this. nokkeun chom maiye string little tied Tie this string a little. chouo give keu sarameun * that man han one nouni eye meresso was blind That man is blind in one eye. hoap'o mouri nalkeisso coloured cloth water will fly This cloth will fade in washing. 7.. 6] 4| 0]^^ 4 4 -f -^ i ch'aik etaisye p'ankakhao this book where print Where was this book printed? i ch'aik yekeuisye pakyesso this book here was hammered This book was printed here. Oppositive case. i EXEECISES. 167 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15- 16. EXERCISE 3 {co7itinued). ninsaikhan saramio avaricious man ii He is avaricious. ^H ^ ^^^ ch'aikeul ta poasso book all have seen I have read all this book. f T^ 4^1 ^^ p'oul ouheui chari p'yera weed above mat spread Spread the mat over the grass. chip syeikan ta irhesso house property all has lost He has lost all his property. ^ 5-^71 ^n^ tteut match'oki eryepso opinion to fit difficiilt He is hard to please. 0]^ ^^^^ '>}^± inan saranghanan aheuio as for this lovable child is This is my favourite child. 4:* ^^^1 i:3L chyongcha parichi malko seed to throw away avoid Don't throw away the seeds. ssi chal touetta simera seeds well have place sow Take care of the seeds and sow them. J 68 COKEAN MANUAL. 6. Exercise 4. sokyeii ' tairo hayera experience according make Act according to experience. maiou keurat toiyesso very wrong has become It is exceedingly wrong. neunghi kamtang hakeisso able responsible will make I have full qualifications. oral kyentaichi mot hakeitta long to endure not will make I cannot endure it any longer. pyengi chom nasso sickness little better He is a little better. maiou isyanghan irio very strange work is This is very strange. ettek'ei saingkak hao how think make What do you think? kakpakhi koulchi malla rudely to behave avoid Don't behave rudely. EXERCISES. 169 EXERCISE 4 (continued). ^^ ^e| |73) %M]v}. ouri touri hamkkeui hapsyeita we two together make Let us act together. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. kapsal koahi chouesso price too many has given He gave too much for it. chom koupko tto chichyera httle boil and also fry Boil some and fry some. koueumyen chal mekkeitta if boil well will eat It will taste best boiled. 415. -S^l 4t^4 pouiro monchi sseurera with brush dust wipe Wipe the dust off with a brush. ^^] y}t t^} ^J'^ tetai kamyen ilk'i souipta slow if go to lose is easy If you are slow you will lose it. ^ 4 <*] ^ ^ 4 ^ nelp'ani nelpko kilta board broad and long is The boards are broad and long. chyekeui marou nohara there flooring place Put the flooring there. 43 170 COREAN MANUAL. Exercise 5. 1- 4^1 f ^ :£^^ orei p'oung nyen teuresso this year plentiful year has entered There are full crops this year. ssal kapsi tterechil-teut hao rice price fall probably make Bice will probably fall in price. paiksyengi kekchyeng epso people anxiety not is The people will not be anxious. chyen nyeneun hyonngnyen ichio before year year of scarcity is Last year was a year of scarcity. chei tokkeuiro chei pareul chchikesso his axe his foot has cut He has brought this trouble on himself. 6. 7. 4^J ^^i ^vl-f-a. tongsaing katch'i * ch'inhao brothers like friendly They are as friendly as brother. keu saram mal hampouro hao that man speech recklessly makes That man speaks recklessly. s| ^^^ y.^^ a nameui sachyengeul moronta others aifairs knows not He does not consider anybody. * Adverb. EXEKCISES. 171 EXERCISE 5 {continued). 10. 11. 12. 13. 1 this 14. 15. 16. ^1 % °i ^a^-f T^ chei il man saingkak hao his work only think makes He thinks only of himself. nai my sokyeneun keure-ch'ant'a experience thus is not My experience is diiferent. te more kouhal ket desiring thing I want nothing more. epso not is «^) ^ ^ ^l 6] JL yeisaron irio ordinary work is It is an ordinary affair. saiei sotongi taitan period reports exceeding There are all kinds of reports now. hao make ^ 7f ^ v^ 5| Ji. nalli nalka ryemnye toio war producing fear becomes They are afraid there M-ill be war. 4^1 <•) koanoueni officials ran away The officials have run away tomanghayesso 1^4 "vV^l ^^ yekchek manhi nasso rebels many have produced There were maiiv rebels. 172 COEEAN MANUAL. 3. 4. Exercise 6. paiami issani * patpi kao serpent is quickly go There is a snake ; go quickly. ^^] ^^ J.t>k tasi salphye pokeisso again having inquired I will see , I will make further inquiries. t^ 1^1 ^ ^^ pyello pounpyelhal ket epso other distniguishing thing not is There is no other means of distinction. t^ t T^n ^^ talli hal souka isso other making way is There is another way of doing it. <^]si ^J S 5!>fc iren ket tto isso this thing more is There are more of this kind. '"^I "^l-f- f-f-fi- tteutei maiou haphao with feeling very corresponds This suits my views. naika hangsyang keurek'ei arasso I always thus knew I was always of this opinion. >|;^6]6}: >7) ^ ^g dl chikeumiya kkaitatkeisso now only I will realise it It is only now that I realise it. * Ni has the force of a semicolon ; see p. 63. EXEKCISES. 173 10. 11. 12. EXERCISE 6 (continued). *) ^it -^^1^1 Tl} 6 1 k'areul mouteuikei mara this knife bluntly Con't blunt this knife. avoid nanan pereuikei ssoyesso as for me by bee have shot I have been stung by a bee. 4: ^3. ot helko terepta clothes torn and dirty My clothes are torn and dirty. «a K ^^^ ppara nipera wash (them and) dress Wash them and wear them. 13. t "^3. i: «f^ 4) -f-^ syoul wine 14. 15, 16. ^1 keurat wrongly mekko nal mata ch'youi drink and day every drunk He drinks and gets drunk every day. 4) t ch'youihan drmik fl**) "^4 sarami men mant'a many There are many drunken men. katta same 5!^d ^}| 4 mitch'in saram koa mad men with They are like madmen. toiyessini tasi sichak have become again begin This is all wrong; try it again. hao make hao make 44 1T4 COREAN MANUAL. 2. 3. Exercise 1. 1. ^^. ^> 4 7^4 chyekeui ka setkera * there go stand be Go there and stand. i ot chal kiouera these clothes well mend Mend these clothes well. hai sye p'yenei isso sun west side is The sun is in the west. ^^1 ^4 t4 -t-^ chei choireul hangpok hao his fault acknowledge make He confesses his fault. kireul ttarakachi mot hao road to accompany not make I cannot keep up with you. tomochi elmana toio altogether how many become How many are there altogether ? .3.5.73^ -e|| J. of 4 morokeisso hyei poara I will not know count see I do not know ; count and see. nemou chyeke sseuchi mot hao too littla to use not make There is too little to be of any use. ^'' Setkera se-itkera. 5. 8. EXEECISES. 175 10. 11. 12. 16. EXEBCISE 7 (continued). chyello keuri toiyesso naturally thus become It became so of itself. t ^ ^^1 ^} S *] -^ nelli tankin saramio broadly travelling men are They are great travellers. moun kyeni mant'a bearing seeing many They have had great experience. 4 H 6 4^*1-1 tou sarameun * syangkeukio two men adversaries are These two men are enemies. ouri niout saramio we neighbour men are We are neighbours. 1* ^d f ''^l '^\'i ^ chinheulkei f ppachyesso mud have fallen I have fallen into the mud. 15. ^^1 4^6f Vjvfc pathei namouri nasso in field vegetables have produced The vegetables have come up. moul chye p'yenei + sao water that side lives He lives on that side of the water. Oppositive case. i Locative case. 176 COEEAN MANUAL. 1. 2. Exercise 8. chye saram choukkei * toiyesso that man dying has become That man is going to die. -T-^ ^Ji 4^7^ "^4 ouri chipei chyouika mant'a our house rats are many Our house is overrun with rats. achik eroun mot toiyesso as yet man not become He is not yet of full age. *a^ "f*^ 4-^ ilcheuk noue chao early resting sleep Go to bed early. 6. A] ^1 oj; ^ «1 T ^ 4: syei ouel man hepi hayesso year month only waste made He was only wasting time. kamcharal eteul sou epso potatoes obtaining way not is There are no means of getting potatoes. 7. 4. tr^y} ^ JL^ i4 homeuika son pota nasso hos hand compared superior The hoe is handier. yamchyenhan pouinio charming woman is She is a pretty woman. Adverb. EXEKCIHES. 177 9. 10. 11. EXERCISE 8 (continued). nophi kere touera highly hang place Hang it high up. kere toul tai epso hang placing place not is There is no place to hang it. i pyengeul chal kotch'ikeisso this sickness well will cure Can you cure this sickness ? yak meko chyosyep chal hao medicine eat recovery well make Take medicine and be careful. mal chamkkan poutchapara horse little take hold of Hold the horse a little. pai arai isso ship below is It is down in the hold. 12. 15. 16. ourinan ryangsik epso as for us supplies not is We are out of food. *>] ^^ '^]A ^ t^ i hainan nouika tang hao this loss who responsible make Who makes good this loss? 45 178 COREAN MANUAL. 3. 4. 5. 7. Exercise 9. ^-1 ^4 J: cL'aik sseukeisso books will write Will you write a booh ? mot sseukeisso not will write I will not write (a book). ouei keuri hao why thus make Why so? 7l 1 'd ^ kyeral epso leisure not is I have no leisure. -I 'i,''] "J 4 pol iri marit'a about to look work many I have much business to attend to. 'i^]jL f a mousam irio what work What kind of business? chyangsa hanta trade I make I am tradinef. a :^}^ *a^^)*J:^t chyanpjsa pyenpyench'ianso trade good not is Trade is not good. EXEECISES. 179 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. EXEBCISE 9 {continued). hoaryounsyen ani oasso fire-wheel-ship not has come A steamer has not come. yang moki pis-ssa foreign cloth dear is Piece goods are dear. syek you manhi teureoasso stone oil many has entered Has plenty of kerosene oil arrived ? chikeumeun chokom man oasso as for the present little only has come Only a little has come at present. keuremyen ettek'ei hao if it is thus how makes it What is then to be done ? nanan morokeisso I will not know I cannot tell. hal Bouka epso about to make plan not is There is nothing to be done. 44 ae^ -?4 olt'a keuri hacha true thus make Good ; do so. 180 COEEAN MANUAL. Exercise 10. ^y} ^^ ^^ 7}^ naika Syeoul oUa kanta I Seoul ascend go I am going to Seoul. 2. 6^ »^ t^ 7]. 7^>t ena ttai kakeisso what time will go Wlien will you go? 3. ^1 -^ Jl 3. eH ^ chikeum morokeisso now I will not know I cannot tell at present. iri epsamyen nai-il kao work if not is to-morrow I go If nothing prevents me I'll go to-morrow. 5. 6. 7. 8. 1 ^^^ JL^ ^^^ mal t'akeisso pokyo t'akeisso horse will ride chair will ride Will you go by chair or on horseback ? yekeui chyoheun mal isso here good horse is Are there good horses here ? yekeui innan mal ta chyekeun kesio here being horse all small things are The horses here are all small. mal saknaiye onera horse wages take out come Hire a horse. EXEKCISES. 181 9. JO. 11. 12. EXEBCISE 10 (continued). ton elmana choukeisso money how much will you give How much money will you give. taran earam elmana chouo other man how much gives How much do others give? t I^ 5J ^ i han mareui tan nyang sik one horse five nyang each Five nyang for each horse. ^ ^f/d ^^ ^^^ nai ham poulle onera my servants call come Call my servants. mal chim sirera horse burden load Load the horse. chim mant'a sokei sirera baggage many on ox load There's much baggage; load bulls. mal epso so man isso horse is not ox only is There are no horses ; only bulls. enchei tora oa molla when back come not know When do you return ? I cannot say. 13. 14. 15. 16. 46 182 COREAN MANUAL. 2. Exercise 11. ^^ 51 V ^ chal innanya well are Are you well ? yei chal isso yes well I am Yes ; I am well. pap mekennanya rice have eaten Have you dined ? pap ani mekesso rice not have eaten I have not dined. t -J 1^ syoul man meke wine only I eat I only take wine. tampai innanya tobacco is Is there any tobacco? t^l ^} ^^ tampai sa oasso tobacco buy have come I bought tobacco. i nyangpan noui taikio this gentlemaxi who house is Who is this gentleman? i). 8. EXEKCISES. 183 10, 12, 18, 14. 15. 16. EXEBCISE 11 (continued). yekeui irman saramio here being man is He belongs to this place. syengi mouessio name what is What is his name? y% /^ a^ 6) X Pang syepang Pang Mr. He is Mr. Pang. lO is Hi 4jL nai ch'inko my friend He is my friend. Sl yo is chyenei ani poasso formerly not have seen I never met him before. chyobeui kachye onera paper bring come Bring me paper. p'yenchi sseukeisso letter I will write I intend writing a letter. pout ani sa oasso pen not buy come I did not buy a pen. 184 COREAN MANUAL. 2. Exercise 13. 1 ^/il ^.^ ^^ tai-in sonnim oasso great man guest has come Visitors have come, sir. myet pouni * osennanya how many gentlemen have come How many gentlemen are there? '*'l 1 *| J: ^ *>}'<^ sei poun io ne ananya three gentlemen are you know There are three. Do you know them ? na mot poa achi mot hao I not seen to know not make I know nothing of them whatever. 3. 5. kyokoun t'ako oannanya chair-coolie ride and came Have they come in chairs? ta mal t'ako oasso all pony ride and came They all came on horseback. 7. ^f ol 3J vr 8. hain iunanya servant is Have they any servant ? ^ ^ "^ ^ ^ !i ^ keuisyou myengham teuryesso jBag-hand card presented The attendant brought their cards. * Nucaerative of gentlemen. EXERCISES. 185 10. 11. 12. 15. EXE BOISE 12 {continued). ^ 4t 4jI a nai ch'inhan ch'inko yo my friendly friend is They are my good friends. sarangei moisye teuryera in guest-room attend present Show them into the drawing-room. chokom anchye kitario little having sat wait Sit down and wait a little. ch'a poue taichyep hay era tea poured welcome make Pour out some tea for them. *| 1-^ ^ ^]± 1 pouneun noui sio * this gentleman who is Who is this gentleman ? alko chinaio know and pass Let me introduce you. nai tongnai ch'inko yo my village friend is A friend from my village. 16. <| 6] .^ol o]x taiki f chyouin io house master is Are you the master, sir ? Sio please. + Tailci sir. 47 186 COREAN MANUAL. Exercise 13. 1. 2. 4. 5. 6- 7. chikeum now ^4 ^^H :a"J-a: ch'acha oassini seek have come Thanks for your visit. komapso thanks ^4; t^ *|-i mousam malsam io what speech is Don't mention it. ^> oikouk saram taran nara foreign man another nation A foreigner visiting another country, v}^ ^^ 5!^1 etchi how ^ *I -I *hH chyouineul ani master not Why not call on you, sir ? oasye come ^>fc ch'atkeisso will seek ^^J hamkkewi 1^)^ oai I i this chyemsim hamkkewi hapsyeita tifi&n together let us make Have tiffin with me. ehopaneul kat mekko breakfast just eat and I have just had my breakfast oasso came ^> ket mat issani thing taste is Try this ; it tastes nice $!>tH >y.^j^ chapsouo (please) eat mat issye taste being It is good. H ^^ "^^ chal mekso well eat I've dinad well. EXERCISES. 187 10. EXERCISE 13 (continued). nai chipeuro ban pen osio my house one time come please Come and see me some time. )tyereul issamyen ch'acha karita leisure if is seek go I will call when I can find time. nari chyemeuressini * kapsyeita day late let us go It is getting late ; I must go. jie| ^^] ^}^ ^^ tJL keuri patpi kamyen mouet hao thus quickly if go what make Why in such a hurry ? chom ancbye niaki-na hao little sat story some make Sit down and talk a bit. chamkkan pol iri isso directly seeing work is I have some business waiting. 12. 13. 15. 10. iri onera kyokoun poullera here come chair-coolie call Boy ! call the chair-coolies. tai-in moisiko kakera great man serve and go Go and see His fixcellency out. Ni has the force of a semicolon ; see p. 63. 188 COPvEAN MANUAL. 7. Exercise 14. 1. ry}x^6)] vf^ 6|wv|: matangei namou innanya in court trees are Are there trees in the courtyard ? 2 c^a x^^ c^jl ^ oV ^^ taran namou epko kkot man isso other wood not is and flowers only are There are no trees, only^^fiowers. kkot p'ouiye poki chyot'a flowers have flowered seeing is good The flowers in bloom are a pretty sight. tongsanei silkoa namou isso in garden fruit wood is There are fruit trees in the garden. keu silkoa mekki chyot'a that fruit eating is good That fruit is good to eat. pathei p'ouri mant'a in field weeds many are The field is full of weeds. f ^^ ^]a ^t >3*^ef p'oul monchye maiko namoul simera weeds first pull and vegetables sow First pull out the weeds and then sow vegetables. 6| ^^ ^0] *J^ i pathei * p'ouri epso this field weeds not are There are no weeds in this field. * Locative case. EXEECISES. 189 9. 10. 11. 12. EXERCISE 14 (continued). ^^t 'I't ^J H 4 keuremyen namoul simera if thus vegetables sow Sow vegetables then. ^ ^-^ ^"^1 5!^j -f JL ta simeun houei etchi hao all sown after how make After they are all sown, what next ? nal mata moul chouera day each water give Water them every day. o] "^^ s.^ i.^] 51^ i namou chyoheun yelmai isso this wood good fruit is There is fine fruit on these trees. houei silkoa chal yelkeisso afterwards fruit well will open There will be good fruit by-and-by. nari kameumyen kkotch'i ta marakeis8o day if dry flowers all will dry up If the weather is dry, the flowers will all dry up. ^i*^l t ^t ^^ IJ^ ehyenyekei moul choumyen kekchyeng epta in evening water if give fear not is If you water them in the evening, it will be all right. j.% «17}- -ky} ^^ onal pika olka pota to-day rain coming likely I see I think it will rain to-day. .13. 14. 15. 16. 48 190 COEEAN MANUAL. 1- 2. 3. Exercise 15. ^0] ^t-tH i-4 ^^ y\ nari syeneurhani koukyeng chal ka day fresh sight-seeing well go It is fine day to go for a walk. onareun * etai ch'youriphakeisso to-day where will saunter Where will you go to-day for a walk ? kal tai manheuntai al sou epso going place being many knowing means not is There are so many places to go to, I can't tell. n»i tongmo hantai ka m( 'ire-po my companion before go inquiio see Go and ask my friend. ^\^ 7^4 "^^ ^i.*a 7)^1. -^ onareun kyereur epso nai-il kapsyeita to-day leisure not is to-morrow let us go We have no time to-day ; let us go to-morrow. y\^ % ^ % A/'i<^ kamyen han sou il toikeisso if go one several day will become How many days will you be gone ? i saii nari kameuressini this period day has dried It has been dry weather of late. s. ^>^-) o| x^ u^e^,] ^x\ koksiki ta marakei t tointa crops all dry become The crops are all being burnt up. 6. Oppositive case. + Adverb. EXEECIBES. 191 10. 11. EXERCISE 15 {continued), pi omyen pori dial tointa rain if comes barley well become If there is rain, we will have a good crop of darley. echyekkeui noun nianhi oatta yesterday snow much came There was a heavy fall of snow yesterday. ^0| ;x|4| 4>^ 4 5 ^^ nari ch'ioue koksik chal mot tointa weather being cold crops well not become The season is cold and the crops don't ripen properly. o]^j\ ^J^H jL^-8: ^^ echyekkeui chipteni onareun tepta yesterday cold to-day is warm Yesterday it was cold; to-day it is warm. koksik chal toimyen ssal kap narikeitta crops well if become rice price will descend If there are good crops, the price of rice will fall. ^^ 4 4 ^1 -1^^ "^0}^- ouri nara keuiho * ollye tarara our nation flag having ascended hang up Hoist the national flag. nari etououl ttai ke ui naryeaa day darkening time flag descend Lower the flag at dusk. 12. 13. 16. nal mata keu tairo hayera day every thus according make Do this every day. * Keui or keuiho flag. Here the latter is better. 192 COREAN MANUAL. X. 2. Exercise 16. Chyosyen soka maiou k'euta Corean ox very big is The Corean ox is very large. chim manhi sitko pat chal kalta loads many carries and field well tills Good for carrying loads and cultivating the fields. *) ^^ -fTl^ zt-|7] ^^^^ i syourei moukeoue kkeueulki eryepta tlfts cart being heavy drawing is difficult The cart is heavy and difficult to draw. him man sseumyen chal kkeueulkcitta strength only if use well will draw If you only exert yourself you will draw it easily. 3. 5. 6. 7. hoangsokei * meiyeya chal kkeueulta bull cafrrying well pulls A bull yoked to it will pull it better. *] ^^ ^3, ^1} ^*^ef i cheumsaing molko naka mekyera these animals drive and out go feed Drive the animals out to feed. 4<>]-;*l ^^ «i^l ^cf songachi nosai manch'i k'euta calf mule size is big A calf is about as big as a mule. mangachi k'eukinan nakoui katta foal as for size ass equal is A foal is as big as an ass. * Locative case. J EXEECISES. 193 EXERCISE 16 {continued). 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. lo. 16. I ri mareuii sarop as for horse three years chinaimyen if pass 4^1 ^^^ cLvokhi t'akeitta sufficiently will ride If a horse is over three years old, it is fit to ride upon. tovachi chip toyachinau * moi tovachi man mot house pig hill pig equal not The domestic pig is not so big as the wild pig. hata make 1 this 7)\ ^}Jl4 4 ^fll kai saonaoa parameul dog fierce men This dog h fierce, it bites men. katkai hachi long distance drive and near to make Drive it far away and don't go near it. melli chchotko moulta bites mara afvoid sout male talkeun ^^ ouroum char fowl cry well The cock crows well. ounta crows am talkeun * al manhi natk'eitta female fowl egg many will produce The hen lays plenty of eggs. chip cheumseung mekimyen rika f house animal if rear profit The rearing of domestic animals is profitable i4 m&nt'a many >| ^] >fc ?| 1 this sai bird ^7] sorai teutki sound hearing This bird sinss well. S4 chyot'a is cTQod Oppositive case. t Though spelt rika, it is read ika. 49 194 COREAN MANUAL. Exercise 17 mousam what 2. ^ao) $!>fc A^t ^a**) ^^ 4. in isso work is What is the matter? yoranhan in riotous work There is a row on. 1880 is ^}l*l -rl^l n^'^ or sarami oumourei ppachyetta man in well has fallen A man has fallen into the well. ouei ppachyesso sarami milchye nemechyetta why has fallen man pushed fell over How did he fall ? He was pushed over by someone. % ^ 4^1 ^ia^y t mal tal ttai torei* ketch'yetta pony riding time stone struck against He struck against a stone while riding keurek'ei malkei tterechyefcta thus from horse fell down He accordingly fell from his horse. H4 ereum ice 5! ^ ^ ^ t mitkeureoue pal poutch'il sou being slippery foot joining means The ice is slippery and one cannot hold one's feet. poutch'il ^ ^4 epta not is pika rain HI 4^ ^'^l -S^^'^ t» U manhi oasye tami mounhechyetta many came wall fell in ruins After the heavy rain the wall all fell down. it -Iv^ ^^ ^^K mokoun poulle kotch'ye ssaraira f coolie call renew build make Call coolies and tell them to rebuild it. Locative case. ^Ssaraira — ssara hay era. EXEPwCTSES. 195 EXERCISE ir [cQutinned). 10. 11. 12. 13. 11. 15. 16. 3.^ *a ^i- 5 i tou mokouii il chal mot this two coolies work well not These two coolies do not work well. hao make sakton wages mokoun coolies ^ 3.^3, cj-i jLt -Iv^ef choue ponaiko taran mokoun given send and other coolies Pay them off and get other coohes. hanahei * ton eima sik one money how much each How much shall I give each coolie? poullera call chouo give 4JI -J) 7j^| 5f?f ^J^l oumoul p'anan tai kiphi well digcjing place deeply "When digging a well, dig it deeply. kipkei p'amyen moul chal sosananta deeply if dig water well springs up If you dig deep, you will get plenty of w^ater. po-haing-koun Syeoul-sye narye foot-going cooHe Seoul from descended The courier has come from Seoul. p'ara dig oatta has come echyekkeui ttenasye ouei chikeum oasso yesterday departed why now have come He left yesterday, why has he only arrived now? y^] -^^ -& ^^-f*i neutkei late omyen ton kamhaye if come money reduced If he arrives late, cut his pay. chouera give * Locative case. 19(5 ' COKEAN ^MANUAL. ^a Exercise 18. I ^i^] 4^ 7}y] 0]^^^ maJ t'ako sanei olia kaki eryepso horse ride and hill ascend going is difficult It is difficult to go up hill on horseback. 2. JLii ^3. ^y?] =^^.4 pokyo t'akj kaki souipta chair ride and going is easy 8. It is easy going by chair. kere kamyen te p'yenhata having walked if go more comfortable (But) going on foot is easiest. ^ Is jLii SjL vj-lr f ejT 7f4 nenan pokyo t'ako nanan mal t'ako kacha as for you chair ride and as for me pony ride and let us go You take a chair and I'll take a pony. elleun kapsyeita hai chyemeulkeisso quickly let us go sun will darken Let us go quickly ; it is getting dark. hai chikeissini keuphi toraka sun will set quickly back go Get back quickly, the sun is setting. pamei kato koaiikyeich'ianso at night go th®ugh concern not is It does not matter though we go at night. kil chyok'o chyou mak katkapta road good and wine booth is near Tho road is good and the inn is near. EXERCISES. 197 10. EXEMCISE 18 (continued). morei naika ch'iiikoral ch'acha kakeitta daj' after ^o-morrow I friend visit will go I shall call on my friend the day after to-morrow. O] ^13.7} ^i ^61) 4^ i ch'inkoka taran kotei sao this friend another in place lives This friend lives in anther locality. 11 7}^ 7^ 6| ^^3.^^y}7]0]^^ kanan kiri hemlniko mere kaki eryepta going road dangerous and distant going difficult The road is long and dangerous and difficult to go. '■'■ "J-^ 7^*) 3!^ ^ ^^ y} apheui kangi issye mot kenne ka in front river being not across go There is a river ahead which cannot be crossed. 13. 14. 15. 16. \i]7} ^ii ;^uj 7}^] 5 ^^ pika omyen kenne kachi mot hao raiu if come across to go not make If there is rain, it cannot be crossed. tari epko pai to epsani ettek'ei hao bridge not is and boat also not is how make There is neither bridge nor boat. "What is to be done ? haro chinaimyen chyokhi kenne kakeitta one day if pass able across will go If you wait a day, you will be able to get across. ^1 *i^^ ^ ^ 51 JL Syeoul yekeuisye myen ni toio Seoul from here how many mile become How many miles is it from here to Seoul? 50 198 COREAN MANUAL. Exercise 19. HH H ^i 5|v] 4 5|.f7^ yere several ni 7a * an toini chom ittaka not become little directly It is no distance ; you will be there directly. t\l ?lt] <^x a^7^ taran kiri epko cbeurem-kil amotber road not is and by-way There is no other road ; there is a short cut. kakeitta will go tF4: ISSO is ^6| ^v^ J.^ ,1 tan moon keu chimi that package kaki olla omyen kil ascend if comes road going If the moon rises, it will be easy going. s4 chyot'a is good moukeoue being heavy t ^> I *l >] ^1 5 t^ ban one sarami man chichi mot to carry not hanta make 5. That package is heavy, it needs more than one man to carry it. tou-6 saram poulle chye kakera two or more men having called carried go Call two or more men to take it away. chyenyekei etai ka chakeisso at night where go will sleep Where will you go and. stay for the night? 0]^]^^ ^^-^t 8. syoul wine etaitenchi etououmyen memeulkeitta wherever if dark I {vill stay I will stay wherever I happen to get to at dusk. makei t teure ka potchim chal booth enter go baggage v/ell See to your baggage when you enter the inn. ^^J ^^ ^>7|4 matkyera entrust One li is equal, approximately, to one-third of an English mile. + Locative case. EXERCISES. 199 EXERCISE 19 {continued). « 10. 12. moulken ta chal touetta articles all well I have placed I have taken charge of all the articles. chikeum ka pap patpi chiera now go food quickly prepare Go now and get me some food at once. pap mekeun houei nai sanei olla kakeitta food eaten after I hill up will go I intend going up the hill after dinner. a 4^1 ^^ 51^ 4 ^^ keu sanei * kounsa issye chin ch'yetta that hill soldier being fort has built The soldiers on that hill have built a fort. yekeui k'eun chyel to itko amcha to itta here large temple also is and shrine also is There is here a large monastery and also a shrine. A^ 7]-^] ^4 ^1 4 H| 'i^ k'eun parai)i poulmycii nakal mat epta great wind if blow going out taste not is There is no pleasure ni going out if it is blowing. 2. ti| ^] ^ ^ 4 V| 7^ «^ 'i ^ ^ pi kaimyen pyet nani kil ttenakeitta rain if stop sunshine come out road will depart I will start when the smi comes out arjd the rain stops. parameul poni onal kakinan * koankycich'iant'a wind see to-day going no concern As the wind is to-day it is all right for going. 4. %]0l^ C^v^ ^]7} ^7\ JL^ nai-ireun chyengnyeng pika olka pola as for to-morrow certainly rain come probable see It will certainly rain to-morrow. i- 1 Ji ^ 4 -I 4iL "k^l^} kouram pomyen pi oi cheungchyo alkestta cloud if see rain coming forecast will know If you watch the clouds you can tell if it is going to rain. 6. >it -^^,| 6].^) nj^l pj^cf san Guei aukai manhi tephita hill above mist many covers A heavy mist hangs over the hills. ankai pcsyechimyen nari tepkeitta miat if undress day will be warm If the mist rises, the day will be warm. ttahi ch'youkch'youkhani koksik dial tointa ground wet crops well become The ground is damp and there will be good crops. Oppositive case EXERCISES. 201 10. EXEBCISE 20 (continued). 4 14 ^3. ^j=°f ^1^ hou tareun tepko chyangma chinta after month hot and rainy season carries Next month is hot and the rainy season sets in. ne enchei oannanya keu sai ouei ani oannanya you when came that time why not came ^Vhen did you come ? ^Tay did you not come then ? mouet hakiro * pochi mot hayesso what making to see not make "NMiere were you that I did not see you? *! ^-^^1 lAi t^] 5l^ ^1^ ^^ i cheueumei pounyohan iri issye chikeum oasso this period troublesome work being now have come I've been very busy and have only just now come. myen nal manei oasso naheul manei oasso h ow many days period have come four days period have come How many days have you been here ? I have been here four days. 11. 12 14. JL 4*^1 44 ^J^l ^}^^ o houei naika chipei kakeitta uoon after I to house will go I intend going home in the afternoon. chokom issamyen nachai toikeitta little if is noon will become It will be noon in a little. 16. "^ ofcf )J;») -^X ^'-j 4^1 ^y^^ nal mata nitchi malko sik houei onera day every to forget avoid food after come Don't forget to come every day after dinner. * Instrumental ease. 51 202 COEEAN MANUAL. 2. 8. Exercise 21. chyoung koiik sarameun lueri kkakko Middle Nation men head cut and Chinese shave their heads, and, ^^ ^1-1-8: 4f ^^^ Chyosyen sarameun syangtou chchanta Corean men top-knot weave Coreans bind their hair up into a knot ^ ^4.*) S^l- ^H ^^\ noun chyengsini chyoha melli ponta eye spirit being good far sees He has good eyesight and can see a long way. H^y} 44 noun chyengkeuika pouchyok hata eye spairit insufficient makes He has weak eyes syokyengeun* pochi mot hako blind to see not makes and The blind cannot see and, koui mekerinan * teutchi mot hanta deaf man to hear not makes The deaf cannot h ear. pengerinan* mal mot hako dumb speech not makes and The dumb cannot speak, and, ancheul panginan tannichi mot hanta sitting room-man * to walk not makes The lame cannot walk. * Oppositivo case t EXEECISES. 203 EXERCISE 21 {continued). «1 e| 6^) t 5!^ ^J 4 H 4 ^ 4^ ^ ^ ^ meriei t'el itko ip koa ni oa hye patak ta on head hair is and mouth and teeth and ton^e surface all He has hair on his head, a mouth, teeth, and a tongue. itta is 10. J- ^-8:*) ^f- ^1 'la H 5: 5^^ keu neulkeunika koui mekko ni to that old man ear eat and teeth also That old man is both deaf and toothless. 11. mal teutchi speech to hear i\ ^k 5 -fa . mot hako koki chal not make and flesh well He can neither hear nor eat. mot not ppachyetta has fallen meknanta eats 12. ^)5. mal S5. ^ ^a kouiro mal teutko k'oro nai matko with ear speech hear and with nose smell smell and One hears with the ear and smells with the nose. 13. mal hako eumsik to speech make and food also One speaks and eats with the mouth. ipeuro with mouth meke eats 14 7] % kich'am ^a cough p'arei in arm nako mok apheuko heri to come out and neck sore and loins also A cough induces pain both in the neck and loins. apha sore him issye moukeon chim chal strength being heavy pack well His arm is strong and he can lift a heavy weight. t ^k -^^ teunta lifts 16. nei your sonkarak chareuko sont'opi fingers short and nails Your fingers are short but your nails are long. kilta long 204 COREAN I^IAXUAL. EXERCLSE 32. kil kanan ttai manhi aissesso road walking time many suffered I have suffered much during the journey. kil melko tto hemhao road long and also dangerous The road was long and also dangerous. 3. >i] ^ ^ ^y ^1 -?- ^ t H ^1 «<^ 5! V^ chikeum naika maiou konhani pouin pang innanya now I very tired empty room is I am very tired ; have you an empty room ? * *1 «^^1 ^"i ^^ ^}^^] 4t-S^ an pangei sonnim issye sarangei ryouhao * inside room guests being drawing-room stay There are guests in the inner room ; put up in the drawing-room i pangi moutenhaye chyokhi ryouhakeisso * this room comfortable able will stay I will take this room ; it is all right. totchari chyengch'iant'a sai ket patkoua onera mat clean not is new article changed come The mat is not clean ; bring a new one. 6. 7. 3. ^4^ ^^ ^-^« H-l ^"^^ totchari chal p'yeko nipoul tephera mat well spread and blanket cover Spread the mat properly and put on a blanket. potchim pang anheuro teurye onera baggage room inside entered come Take my baggage inside the room. * The r is more or less mute, — youhao, etc. EXEKCISES. 205 EXEBCISE 22 (continued). poul ttaii-tenchi an ttaii-teiichi koankyeicb'iant'a fire burn whether not burn v/hether no concern is It does not matter whether you hght a fire or not. teung poul hyemyen chyok'eitta lamp fire if you light it vTill be good It will be all right if you light a lamp. nanan p'yengsangeisye * chom noue chakeitta as for me level table little rested will sleep I intend to lie down a little and have a sleep. 10. tampai mekeun houei ka noue chao tobacco eaten after go rested sleep Take a smoke and then go to sleep. 13. t "-f'Hl ^^ °j-| y]A) «JU.V|: syoul makei f mousam mekeul kesi innanya wine booth what eatable things are What have they got to eat in the inn ? 14. t ^J- ^^ t ^ ^N 4 pap sang notk'o I syoul te kachye oa rice table place and wine also bring come Bring me dinner and some wine. chyouin poalle pap kap hoikyei hayera master call rice price reckoning make Call the landlord and pay the bill. ^J- 7) ^ ^5J:^ "^ *d ^*ll:*1 y}JL pap kap ta patasso tai-in p'yengani kao rice price all have received great man peacefully go Your account is paid ; a pleasant journey, sir. 15. IG * Ablative case. + Locative case. I With an aspirated root, a7id — k'o. 52 206 COKEAN MANUAL. Exercise 23. 4 ^ '^ 4 >% «^ 6) 4 tong sye nam pouk sa pang ira east west south north four regions are North, South, East, and West are the four points of the compass. 2. 4 4 T^ ^^1 5| ^>3 y.^]t\ tong p'yen syoup'oul sokei moi cheumsaing mohitR east side forest inside hill beast assemble There are many wild animals in the forests to the east. ^ ^ ^yt") ^i^ "i^i ^^^ sye west manhi kouk sarami chyangsa nation man trade many Western nations are large traders. hayetta have made nam p'yeneuro kamyen nari te south region if go day more If you go to the south the weather is warmer. ^^ tepta warm -4 fouk north ^0) 4V)77>^^ ^6] ^]^^ nan p"oungi pouni-kkanteuro wind blow because day It is chilly, as there is a north wind blowing. ch'ioue is cold 6. ^ 4t -t-l ^]7} 4 'i-7^^^ k'eun param poulmyen paika chal nakakeitta large wind if blows boat well will go out If a strong wind blows the ship will go out well. 7. chyekeui there ka go tokkeui 7H -2. *^ 4 kachye onera axe bring come Go there and bring an axe. '8. naika namoural kkakkeitta I wood will split I intend cuttmg some wood. EXERCISES. 207 EXERCISE 23 {continued). 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 16. o]<\ 7f V^ etai where go ^Vhere are you going ? 'J- J: 3. 7} J. apheuro kao before I go I am going in front. H'^l^^ JLVi^ -]5.>^ ^ etaisye onanya whence come Where do you come from ? touu'osye onta from behind I come I come from behind. nai my ^^1 ^ ^fS kyethai tou saram side two men There are two men at my side. 5!^ itta are ^5£ ^ ^ ^tj?{- nenan as for you nai om my left You stand at my left side. p yenei side syera stand keu that ^>l-e: Mi 1-8: Ml -1^ ^i ^^ sarameun * nai orheun p'yenei syera man my right side stand Let that man stand at my right side. etai ka noue chao chikenmemi morokeitta where go rested sleep as for the present I will not know Where are you going to sleep ? I cannot tell at present. 13. ^^^] ^o\^ ^f^-)-^^ -t*l4 patpi quickly keriei street nirena tarampakchil rise up run-action Get up quickly and run. hayera make tarananan riinnincj > } a saram men i4 There are a great many men in the street running. mant'a many * Oppositive case. t Locative case. 208 COREAN I\IANUAL. Exercise 34. 1. ^ 3^^l] >i^| ^a ^6] 7jc|. pouk p'yenei sani nopko kori kipta north border hills high and valley deep There are high hills and deep valleys in the north. 2. 7| ^^ 3| 4>^J -^4 kak saik moi cheumsaing mant'a each colour hill animals many There aie many wild animals of all kinds. 3 «j-e: ^7] ^^3. ^^ 4?] ^j^ pemeuu * ssoki eryepko komeun chapki souipta tiger shooting difficult and bear catching easy Tigers are difficult to shoot ; bears are easy to catch. Chyosyeneun * ch'ong meimyen ta p'osyou norat-hao Corea gun if carry all hunter play the part of All Coreans carrying guns are considered hunters. 6. 3l^2 ^ "^ 4 4 jc-sf^ chosim _ haye ch'ong chal nohara care having made gun well ■ fire Be careful and fire the gun properly. 6. ^7^)4^ ^^ "^3. koankyeich'anso kekchyeng malko concern is not fear avoid Don't be alarmed ; there is no fear. nai-il nai cheumsaing chapeure kanta to-morrow I animals to catch go I am going hunting to-morrow. 8. morikoun poulle hamkkeui ka drivers call together go Get drivers to go with me. * Oppositive case. EXEECIrtES. 209 9. 10. 11. EXERCISE 24 {continued). mekeul kesal chom yeipihayera eatable things little prepare Prepare something to eat. ^ 0] >^}l ^o\ y}7^ ^\y^]^t^i\. 1011 i saram choue kachye kakei-hayera money this man given take make go Give some money to this man to take. ^^l ^<^] sef -^^2.^ sou-il houei tora okeisso some day after back I will come I will be back in a few days. nai kan houei chip chal poara I gone after house well look Look properly after the house when I am away. ^i'i^ ^H ^^l °^l^I 4^1 -^ sanyang kasye cheumsaing manhi chapchio hunting having gone animals many catch please Good sport to you when hunting. chim ta siressini kapsyeita baggage all have loaded let us go Let us go ; the baggage has all been packed. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. nai koukyeng karyehanta I sight-seeing am about to go I am going to take a walk. >m -1*^ :'>^ i-4 °vt4 sanei * olla kamyen koukyeng mant'a hill up if go sight-seeing many There is an excellent view from the top of the hill. * Locative case. 53 210 COREAN i\tANUAL. Exercise 25. 1. ^ ^ ^ '>]± i eun myet nyaiig chyoung this silver how many ounces heavy are How many ounces does this silver weigh ? chyeoul kachye onera tara poara scale brought come having weighed see Bring the scales and weigh it. tara poncheuk neng nyang chyoung io weighed seen four ounces heavy is The scale shows four ounces in weight. keu kapsai p'aimyen ton mitchio that for price if sell money lose I will lose money if I sell at that price. ena kesi ihanka * moure poara what thing profitable inquired see Ascertain which is profitable. Chyosyen toni ihao yang-eun-chyeni ihao Corean cash profitable foreign silver money profitable Which is more profitable, Corean cash or dollars ? chikeumeun yang-eun-chyeni herhaye ika epta as for now , dollars being cheap profit not is As dollars are cheap at present no profit can be made. yang-eun-chyen ban ouen t kasye patkooa onera dollar one gone changed come Go and get me change for a dollar. 5. 7. * Ka in ihanka — whether. +Numerative of dollars. EXERCISES. 211 10. EXERCISE 25 {continued). elleun naka eun kap ara poko onera quickly go out silver price know see and come Go quickly and bring me word as to the price of silver. kapsal alketeun naikei cheuksi alkeihayera price if know to me directly make know Let me know directly 5'ou ascertain the price. " 7| 4 i^i jl^l JL come changed I give I do not want beans ; bring gold and I'll exchange with you. motemi moulkeun kapsi ta pis-ssasye heungchyeng hal sou epso all articles price all being dear trade making means not is One cannot do any business, as prices are all too high. 16. >^-^ :^}^ ^^1} 4^ 77 >) '^^l^di syekyou chyangsa hataka ponchyen kkachi epsechyesso kerosene trade when making capital until disappeared His capital disappeared when he was in the kerosene trade. * Ya added to the perfect participle has the sense of "having only," "if only." 212 COEEAN MANUAL. Exercise 26. chyechaei naka iren moulkeneul sa onera to shop go out Buch article buy come Go to the shop and buy such an article. 2 >t a 7l 4 ^ ^V -^ ji ^i 4 5: 4 4 ^ »^ sf so koki pan keun sa oko silkoa to chom sa onera ox flesh half catty buy come and fruit also little buy come Buy half a pound of beef and also some fruit. 3. J: ^ >^]^| :£ M V ^ ^1 7j-/^| «j 0^ ^ >fc p'omok sisyei teurennanya yei kapsi tterechyesso cotton goods price have heard yes price has fallen Do you know the price of cotton cloth ? Yes ; the price has fallen. .. *^^*| ^ -i^l $\a^ 7j-^| H]J^ 4 A yangmoki p'ek manhi oasye kapsi maiou ssao piece goods abundant many having come price very low is With a large import of piece goods the price is very low. 5. ^^ ^^ 314 myenchou silk nemou too pis-ssa dear 4^] sachi The silk is too dear : I 5 mot to buy not cannot buy it. ^ hanta make 7J-4S: s^l^i^ ^1^-^ 4^5!^ 4 kapsanan chyoch'iank'o pitaneun chom as for gauze bad and as for silk moth The gauze is bad and the silk is moth-eaten. mekesso has eaten 7. 4^ 'i^'^ ^>fc -f- 3| °i^l i so kachok ox elmana isso skins how many are How many ox hides are there? ou p'l manhi isso ox skins many are There are many ox hides. ^3] 7J-4 'i^}^ '?]-?- ^^v^ ^}^]JL tonp'i kapsi elmanya maiou noukeuni sasio sable price how much is very cheap buy please What is the price of sable ? Very cheap ; buy, please. EXERCISES. 21i EXEllCISE 26 {continued). 9JL 3| ^^*| ^>t J^ 7MI 4^MI 11:4 p'yo p'i pari cpso keu kosi koaiikyeich'iant'a leopard skin foot not is that thing concern not is There are no claws to the leopard's skin. That does not matter. 10. ho p'i k'eun kct to itko cliyckeun kct to manhi isso tiger skin large tiling also is and small thing also many is There are large tiger skins, but there are many small ones. kcu kapsainan * p'alchianso chom te chousio that to price as for sell not little more give please I cannot sell at that rate ; make it a little more, please. 12. ^^4^1 6]. >t M| 7|- 3!^ 45^ 7\^]^ pis-ssachianso naika nrtchye p'anan kesio dear not I losing money selling thing is It is not dear. I am selling it at a loss. 33. p'alki seulk'cteun keumantouera ssaii kosi anita selling if refuse let alone cheap thing not is If you don't want to sell, all right. It is not a cheap article. 14 6] ^ 6| ^^^ 5jc^ ^ v^ ^^^1*14 i sai ch^iangsa ette hanya pyenpyench'iant'a this period trade how make good not is How is business at present? Not good. 4 -'l^ ^31 "M-^ 3!^f4 cun kapsan noukko yangmokeun pis-ssata silver as for price cheap and piece goods as for dear is The price of silver is low and piece goods are dear. p'okouei chyangsaka mohye sero tat'oa p'alko santa in port traders assembled each other strive sell and buy Merchants crowd to the port and compete with each other in business. 15. IG * From kapsai (locative case), with nan (oppositive case ending) added. 54 214 COEEAN MANUAL. iXERCISE) "4/. 1. ^ A- tasat five kachi kinds A cL massal taste t} 4 e^l 5. ta all cb'ai'yeiio one bv one Name the five tastes one by one. nV jr. mal hay era speech make i^ 5f 2 ^ ^> € 1 ^J: tr *J ^> ^^1-$: ^^^1 JL tan mat ssemi mat cbchan mat renin mat maion niiissio sweet taste bitter taste salt taste sour taste acrid taste is There are sweet, bitter, salt, sour, and acrid flavours. 3.^]^ ^4 l^t ti'i '"-t'^l 3. 71] ^ 7] 4 iren tasat massal etten yakeinan korokei syekkera such live tastes some in medicine as for equally mix Mix these five flavours equally ni some medicine. n V\ 4. >^}|n|,i^ ^j-e:^-tS.^Vi:il^7 saram mata ipcmi kathato massal korokinan man each as for mouth same though taste as for distii ction all dij'fer Though men have mouths alike, they all differ as to fiavoui-s. la lalla 11 s.f-S. i^a ^}r ^3. ^^^ kkoureun talko ch'onan seuiko hoch'onan as for honey sweet and as for vinegar sour and as for pepper Honey is sweet, vinegar sour and pepper pungent. ^1 maipta is acrid f 6. « H ^4 pata sea ^]-5L ^ ^^ X3 -5-^ moureun chchako saiam moureuii as for water salt and spring as for water Sea water is salt and spring water is tasteless. ^^ seumkcpta insipid 7.>^^4 ^r^ «^4 y]^]^ ^t^ y^^]^. silkoa talmyen nikeun kesio seuimyen sen kesira fruit if sweet ripe thing is if sour unripe thing is Fruit if sweet is ripe, but if sour unripe. -6}Ml ^3. $J«a f ^ M|6}A)j v^c^ hyangnai nako etten p'oureun naiamsai nanta as for flower perfume arise and some as for weed stench arises Flowers smell sweet, ))ut certain weeds give a bad odour. kkotch'an 10 EXi^iiLlhES. 215 EXERCISE 27 {continued). p'oureuii ket nourcmi ket pouikeun ket beum kct kemeiui kesio green thing yellow thing red thing white thing black thing is There are green, yellow, red, white, &ud black (colours). 4 ^U "^ 7j 4 ^ ^f 4 ?f -I ^U T^ 4 ^ ^1 -S. pomeinan namki p'ouratal^a kaeureinan noureuu pitch'io as for in spring tree green is as for in autumn yellow colour is In spring the trees arc green, but in autumn their colour is yellow. "tl: 7\^^ 4,^^ ^3. 4lr f|^ soutch'an * kemeto poul kkotcli'an * poulkko cliainan * heuita cliarcoal black though fire flower red and ashes white Though charcoal is black, the flames are red and the ashes white. 12. iL>^ ^ 4 -^ t 31 ^1 °i ^ 7| ^ S:^] ^^ 4 Chyosyeu euipokemi heum pitch'i mank'o kemeuri osi + chj'ekta Corean a.s for dress white colour many and black clothes small Cortans wear mostly white clothes, seldom black. 13. JL i ^}J] m ^^ ^^ <^J:. o , saik patkeui taran pitch'an pyello epso five colour besides another as for colour specially not is There are no special colours besides these five. 14. 6] ti] cv J. 4| A 7| 7| ^ 5| -f- 6^ ef i ])itan o saikeul kak kak nanhoa touera this silk five colour each each divided place Keep these five kinds of coloured silk distinct from each other. 1-511 ^^3. l^-fjl V}] 6j-^}j 3.3:. 3I-4 pitch' an nouneuro pounpyelhako naiamsai k'oro matba as for colour by eye distinguish and odour by nose smell We distinguish colour by ihe eyes ; smells by the nose. i« ^1 ^^ 31 ^ ^3. ^H ^ \1:4 kkotch'an koheun pit to itko hyangnai to nanta as for flower pretty colour also is and perfume also arises Flowers look pretty and smell fragrant. * Oppositive case. + Properly oti, but read osL 216 COREAN ^MANUAL. 3. EXEIICTSE 28. mal pori manlii niekiinyeii sal cliiiita horse barley mauy if feed flesh makes If you give the pony plenty of barley, he will grow fat. ^J ^-] 5 4 JJL ^ t ^J ^} -S. ^i ef chip paik iiiont koa pori ban syem sa onera straw hundred bundles and barley one bag buy come Buy one bag of barley and 100 bundles of straw. onal nat liouei naika mal t'ako etai cbom kakeitta to-day noon after I horse ride and where little will go I am going out a little this afternoon on horseback. mapou tarye mal ancliaug cliieurako * hayc a groom to "horse saddle carry" say Tell the groom to saddle the pony. seuikol ka k'ong sasye malkkeui sire oUye oa province go beans having bought on hor^e loaded nscended come Go and buy beans in the covmtry and bring them up on ponies. chim ta oatketeun kokkanei pourye teuriko sak choucra load all if have come in granary unloaded enter and hire give Put the goods into the granary when they come, and pay the hire. 7 ^ ^ ^ *f i" ^ i. ^ °d f^-fJ. tan nyang chyekta hako yel nyang man tallahao five nyang is small says and ten nyang only demands He says five nyang is too little, and wants ten nyang at least. «^ ^ ^a l£ ^|>^M H 5 ^f 51 '^ T Jl yen nyang patkonan saksi chyeke mot kakeitta hao six nyang receive-and-as-for price being small not will go says He says he won't go even for 000 cash, as the hire is too small. Ko is used to indicate the end of a quotation. EXERCISES. 217 10. EXERCISE 28 {continued). ^^<^] -^i-^ Hi: 7f^l 71- vt'^ Chyosyenei koksikeun yesat kachika iianta in Corea grain five kinds produce Coroa produces five different kinds of grain. ssal koa k'ong koa p'at koa pori oa mireul heuni mekso rice and beans and peas and barley and wheat mostly eat Bice, beans, peas, barley, and wheat are mostly eaten. " "^ ^^5. t ^J 4 4 '^f ^f "^4 sieil^ mil karo ban syem p'arataka ttek mantalkeitta wheat flour one bag having bought bread I will make I intend making bread when I have bought a bag of flour. seuikol saram kananhaye pori oa kouiri man meke province man being poor barley and oats only eat The country people are poor and can only eat barley and oats. 13. Syeoul sarameun nengnekhaye nipssal koa p'at man meke Seoul as for man being sufficient shelled rice and peas only eat The people in the capital being well-to-do can live on rice and peas. 14.^5:41-1 4^ ^3.^1 ^^ °i^) i-J^ pouk to saramteul kamcha oa momil nongsa manhi hao north province men potato and buckwheat agriculture many make In the north the people cultivate potatoes and buckwheat. 15 «] 4 4 -f 4 of V 4 5|. - ^61| ^ X^t^ paich'you oa mou oa nianal kya p'anan ttangeisye nanta cabbage and turnip and garlic and onion from eai-th produce Cabbages, turnips, garlic, and onions are grown. 16. «] 4 7^ 4 ^ ^ 4 4# ^V ^ t "^ 5l '^ pai oa kam koaneungkeum koa poksyonga oa kyoul ta itta pear and persimmon and apple and peach and orange all are There are pears, persimmons, apples, peaches, and oranges. 55 218 COEEAN MANUAL. Exercise 20. ^V 7^3. 7}^ Ji?| >J1H4 pat kalko kacul pori simera field till and autumn barley sow Plough the land and sow antunni barle}\ 2- 7}-^ jte| 4 Ji.5) Jlf vjcf kaeul pori pom pori potam natta autumn barlej' spriiip^ barley more is superior The autumn barley is superior to the spring sowing. mil kaeurei simcuko k'ong pomei smieunta wheat in autumn sow and beans in spring sow Wheat is sown in autumn and beans in spring. koksiki chal toimyen pailsyengi ta kekcliyeug epso crop well if becomes people jdl anxiety not is [The people are free from care if they have good crops. chyen nyeneun * hyoungnyen itteni oreun p'oungnyen teurcsso former year famine was but this year full year entered Last year there was a famine, but this year there are full crops. i sai nemou kameure sichyeri chal mot toil-teut hao this period too much being dry crops well not become likdy make It is too dry at present and there is every chance of bad crops. ' -^i^] f ^ ^^ -t«l ^1 ^f I "J^ orei hyoungnyen toimyen koulme choukeul saram mant'a this year scarce year if become sta,rved about to die men many If there is a famine tiiis year, many will die of starvation. monchye tareun kameulteni i tareun haro kenne pika o previous moon was dry but this moon one day across rain comes Last month was dry, but this month there was rain every other day. 5. 6. * Oppositive case. EXEKCTSES. 219 10. 1 EXERCISE 20 {continued). ^o] J: 5^^ ti]7f 4-^}. jic]. iiari beuryesye pika olka pota day being cloutl}'' rain coining likely I see The day is cloudy and it looks like rain. k'eun param poultcni n(;un sa m^eneuro * narakanta great Avind blew but fiiow four faces fly away A strong wind blew and the snow was driven in all directions. i 6| ^1 uL i- I *| ^4 ^a^ 7f ^ ^ -f ^ nari malkko kourami noplia ilkeuika syeneurhata day clear and clouds being high weather is refreshing AVith a clear sky and high clouds thQ weather is fine. 2. ^} n|. ^ ti) 7|. _6 oj. 7). ^] '^ ^) 3i c| 5£ ^ 4 chyangma ttai pika otaka kaimyeu hai pit te tteukepta rainy season time rain having come if stops sun colour more is warm If it clears up during the rainy season, the sun is all the hotter. 11. syonaki olchekei moucliikei sj-eko penkai oa ourei hao shower coming time rainbow stand and lightning and thiinder makes AVith a shower there comes the rainbow, with thunder and lightning. penkai oa noisyeng hateni nouika pyerakeul machyetta hao lightning and thunder made but who thunderbolt has met says He says somebody was struck with lightning during the thunderstorm. 'I ^ 7f ^) ^ ^^-1- *| ^ '^l-^] 3,7}^'>]^t^ ilkeuika ch'ioue oupaki ssotachiko kang mouri eresso weather being cold hailstones pour out and river water was frozen DuriiifT the cold weather there v/as a fall of hailstones and the river froze. param poulko nouni onikka ereum cheuch'ire mot kao wind blow and snow having come ice to slide not go I could not go skating on account of the snow and the wind. 15. IG. * Instrumental case. 220 COREAN lytANUAL. Exercise 30, ereum toutlieouni ppachilka nycmnye hachi ice being thick falling anxiety to make Don't be afraid of falling, for the ice is thick. nfef niara avoid 2. dj.6,] ti]7|- $\^ «^^1 «^c].6| 5ja^o|. pamei pika oasye ttahi taitani mitkeurepta in night rain having come ground exceedingly is shppery Eain fell during the night, and the ground is very slippery. 7}^ Jl^^ HJ ^I ^ t ^ ^f kachye onera nai syei syou liakeitta brought come I wash hand will make Bring me some water ; I want to wash my hands. moul water 4.6] ^6] ;^>1*>1:«'H ^*h ^^ ^?1sf i mouri chyengcli'ianini ssota naiye parycra this water clean not is poured taken out throw away This water is not clean ; throw it away. 5. ^'^] ^^ :S.^:^- ^'^] ^^ ¥f^ tokei moureun heuriko pyengei moureun malkta in jar as for water cloudy is in bottle as for water is clear The water in the jar is dirty, but that in the bottle is clean. pinou oa syouken katta nok'o t'ongei teon moul pouera soap and towel gone place and in tub hot water pour Get soap and a towel, and put hot water in the bath, nai konhanikka onareun ilcheuki nouechakeitta I tired because as for to-day early will sleep I am tired and will go to bed early to-day. pangei chari p'yeko yo touichipe kkarara in room mat spread and mattress reversed spread Spread the bed on the floor and turji the mattress over. EXEECISES. 221 EXERCISE 30 {continued). 9. 4 e| c^ ^ JL v] /}j :7j ^ a «>]■ '^i jL v] ^ ^ ef chad tereoni sai ket })atkoa kkalko nipoul p'yera mat dirty new thing changed spread and blunket spread The mat is dirty;, get a new one and put a blanket over it. nai-il ilcheuki kkaiouera nai ketong cii'ainAeihakeitta to-morrow early awaken I royal procession will participate Call me early to-morrow ; I assist at the Koyal Procession. tongchi tal tongchi nal naranimkomi chyeisa banta solstice moon solstice day king sacrifice makes The King sacrifices on the occasion of the winter solstice. keu sai min kanei sotongi taitan hayetta hao that period pejple among disturbance exceedingly made says He says that there was then much excitement among the people. ettek'ei arasso p'yenchi to poke si;nioun to teuresso how knew letter also see and rumours also heard How do you know ? I had letters and I also heard rumours. "-'I 7i^| >fe-f -f H t-B: ^ a-k "r ^Jb mm kanei sotonghanan mareun ta miteul sou epso people among disturbing speech all reliable means not is Reports current among the people are never to be believed. 15.4 $^6) ^^ ^ ^^^^yts.3. «1 A )} J: koanoueni chal mot tasarinikkanteuro minyo nasso official well not rule because revolution arose The people rebelled on account of the oppression of the ofticiak. 10.7] i\^] i-Ti ^^I ^«} -fv^ 4^^) J2.5. keriei koukyeng kouni elma moUye syennanchi moro in street sight-seeing persons how many driven stand whether know not I cannot tell how many spectators were collected in the street. 56 222 COREAN MANUAL. ExEliCISE 31. I ^14 ^l-^: 4^1 I ^^ 4 null anchaiig chieuii houei mal kellyera horse saddle carry after horse walk Lead- the horse round after saddling. ttam heiillyessini anchang achik petkichi mara sweat flowed saddle as yet remove avoid It is perspiring; don't take off the saddle yet. param ssoimyen mal pyeng tuelki souipta ■wind if sVioot horse sickness entering is easy If the pony catch cold it will be sm-e to be ill. moukeoun chim sokei srtko kapayaon chim malkei sirera heavy load on bull load I'lnd light load on horse load The heavy packages put on a bull, the light ones on a pony. 0. 7. onal kil ttenamyen etaicheum kasye memeulkeisso to-day road if depart whereabout gone will stop Where will you stop on the road if you start to-day? 7f^4 ^ t t °-^ ^I^^"^ 4^1-4. kataka chyenghan syoul mak issamyen chachio going when . clean wine booth if be sleep I will rest wherever I find a clean inn. chini sireun mal monchye ponaiko pack loaded horse before send and Send the pack ponies on ahead, and ouri touri tonghainghaye toui ttarakanta Y^(j two accompany behind follow "We two wiJi follow up together after. EXERCISES. 223 10. 12. EXERCISE 31 {continued). 9. :3. 5 I 6] 6^ ^4 ^q ^A ^\ 7f 5^ -t JL keu sarami ecbekkeui oasye oiial karyehao that man yesterday came to-day is about to go That man came yesterday and intends to leave to-day. 55^1 ^\^ ^^1 A^] *^^1 ^V^ etchi onareun nacbai kyeioue yekeui oannanya wherefore to-day noon exceeded here have come How was it that you came when it was past noon to-day V ach'amei patpouko i ttai man kyereuri isso early busy and this time only leisure is I was busy in the morning and only now found time. 01 t\ -f a ;«^ v^ 61) 7|-°i 53 c| -f J^ il ta hako chyenyekei kamycn ette hao work all make and in evening if go how make How about going in the evening after finishing the work ? -^^-8: 714 'iJ^t.H ^1 *i 4^ 5|7^I tjSL onareun kyereur epsani nai-il oasye hoikyei hao as for to-day leisure is not to-morrow came accounts make I have no time to-day ; come to-morrow and settle accounts. neuan koukyeng kananya nanan taran tai ch'youriphakeitta as for you sight-seeing go as for me other place will saunter Are you going for a walk ? I am going somewhere else. nai chyen nyenei seuikol kattaka pan nyen manei olla oasso I former j^ear province gone half year period up came Last year I went to the country but came back after six months. nei il houei naral tasi pomyen chasyeihi alkeinnanya you da^ after me again if see distinctly will know Will you be able to recognise me when you see me again ? 13 224 COEEAN MANUAL. Exercise 33. i poi oa iiioumyengi chyoheuiika poara this linen and cotton good whether look See whether this linen and cotton are good. 2. 7. i moumyengeun kaneulko chye poinan koulkta this cotton fine and that linen eoarse is This cotton is fine and that linen is coarse. i mosi myet chanka * chaiye poara this grasscloth how many feet being measured look How many feet does this grasscloth measure ? keu sarameul namou karioue pochi mot hata that man trees having hidden to see not make I could not see the man, he was hid by the trees. ^*] ^^] -fd ^^1 ^1 4tJL nouni keunsi hamyen keunsi Ivvengeul sseuo eye short sight if make short sight f pecti.cles use Use spectacles if you are short-sighted. p'ai-moul chyenei ka ankyengeul sa onera jewel things shop go spectacles buy come Go to the jeweller's shop and buy spectacles. mouesitenchi chyoheun kesal sa onera whatever good article buy come Buy whatever is good. chyekeui mousam pol irio yekeui mouesal ch'aseo there what seeing woi'k is here what seek What is there to see there? What are you looking for here? * Chanka contracted for cha (foot) and inka (is it?). EXERCISlilS. 225 EXEBCISE 32 {continued). 10 a ]> I 6| 4s 4;^ ^ -f v^ ;*^ 4Hj x\ kananhan saramirato poucharen hamyen chal chinaita poor men is though active if make well pass The poor will be able to exist if they are industrious. keieran saraineun mattangi kananhao idle men properly poor Idle people deserve to be poor. pouchareni hamyen syangkeup patko keieramyen pel chounta actively if make reward receive and if lazy punishment give I reward the active and punish the lazy. 57 15. 16. 226 COREAN MANUAL. Exercise 33. nai chip chieuryeliaiii moksyou poulle euinonliayera I house am about to make carpenter call consult I am going to build a house ; arrange with the carpenters. 2. ^1 ^ 4 -I cf. 6^1 ») -f ^.^1 v| ^ ^;c^ ^^ chaimok koa to! ta yeipihayessini ton monchye chouo materials and stone all prepared money before give I have all the materials and stones ready ; advance me some money. niokoun poullesye ttang kipkei p'ako k'eun tol nohara coolies having called earth deeply . dig and big stone place Get coolies, dig the fomidations well down, and put in big stones. patkeui tanieun * pyektollo ssako an tamemi heulkeuro si-tna outside Vr'all with brick build and inside wall with mud build Make the walls of brick, but use mud for the partitions. mokoun il man cbal hamyen syangkeup pateurira coolie work only well if make reward will receive The coolies will only get a gratuity if they work Vvell. onal manil pi om3^en tam ssaclii mara to-da,y if rain come wall to build avoid Don't build the wall to-day if it should rain. il chal hayessini mokoun sak chouko syoiil kaj) te chouo work well has made coolie wages give and wine price more give They have worked well ; give the coolies their pay and a pourhoire. hai toteul ttaiei nirena ireul ilcheuki sichakhayera sun rising time rise work early begin Get" up at sunrise and set about your work early. * Oppositive case. EXERCISES. 227 10. 1. EXEBCISE 33 (c-ontimied) , keu kitong choui pitkoureiuii kotkei - syeiouera that pillar little slanting upright erect Put that pillar up straight ; it is slanting. >^ 4?^ ^'^f i4^ 1 ^^ 4 7| >t i t «i ef syekkarai oa taran chaimolceul ta koteun kesaro * haj'^era rafter and other materials all straight thing make Put the rafters and all the other beams properly straight. kaioachyaiigi poulle kioa tantani niera brickman call tile firmly connect Call a bricklayer and roof the house properly. chipong chal mot nieumyen pi saiki souipta roof well not if connect rain leaking easy If the roof is not properly put on it will leak. ^1^J=*'1 -1^1 ^'^l '^^l i-<^4 michyangi poulle tamei myenhoi hayera plasterer call on wall lime make Call the plasterer and plaster the walls. pyekeun hoi oa heulkeul syekke paHara partition lime and mud mix plaster Piaster the wall with lime and mud mixed together. 4i ^ 4^ 4^ 7> -^fj f "i-ef sapyek myet pari sata ka ouheui pallara mortar several loads buy go above plaster Get several loads of mortar and plastdr it over. chipi tomochi myet kan inya hyeiye poara house altogether how many kau is count see How many rooms are there? Count and see. * Instrumental case. 13. 15. 16. 228 COEEAN MANUAL. Exercise 34. syarangei soniiimi teuressini poul chom tteiiyera in drawing-room guest have entered fire little light Light a fire in the drawing-room ; guests have come. namou epsani kakaei ponaiye han mon/^ wood not is shop having sent one bun ' There is no wood; send to the shop and buy .i koult'ong nopkei ssamyen yenkeuika ch-;i ■ ...1, chimney highly if build smoke we . The chimney will draw well if you build it nigli. ko'ilt'ong nacheumyen yenkeui syevmta cliiumey if low srnoke rivet (turns back) If the chimney is low it will fill the room with smoke. taichyangchyangi oasye moun chameulsoi pakcina hayera big workman came door lock to nail make Tell the blacksmith when he comes to fix the lucks on the doors. 6. :£ ti| ^j: 6| ^ v| aj- 4 5. «) -f 6| 4 topaicliyangi poulle pang ta topai hayera paper-hanger call room all paper-hanging make Call the paper-hanger and have the whole house papered. 7.S31 4 f 5: «;J>tv| Hj 6^ «. jyi}^ ^1-4 chyoheui oa p'oul to epsani nai-il tou kachi sa oa pape-if and batter also not is to-morrow two kinds buy come There is neither paper nor paste. Buy both to-morrow. 8 ^^ V ^ S S| 5. «'r ^31 ^ol) «f i S f| ^^ vf inonchye nachan chyohjuiro * pareuko houei taran chyoheui palla fi];st low paper smear and after other paper smear Use cheap paper for the first coat, and other paper for the second. * Instrumental case. EXEELi.^r..-^. 2-29 EXERCISE 34 {continued). 9. onal taikameul choiu poiopcha hako oasso to-day excellency little let us visit saj' and have come I have come to-day to pay my respects to Your Excellency. 10. 6) ^ 0) "i J] 7} ^] ^ ri^ ^ i* «i 5^ oJ: -f Jl i sai ilkeuika ch'ioun-tai nyenhaye p'yenganhao this period v\-eather cold time consecutive is well How have you been keeping during these cold days ? " t^l ^^ ^i 5l^°f^ l-fe ^^ i-Jt yei nanan chal isso manan taikeun ette hao yea as for me well is only as for sir how make Yes, I've been very well; but how are yoa, sir? '^ J.^-^ ^^y} -}^ 4^ ^^)^ ^^ onareun syerika manhi oasye nachaioan tepta as for to-day frost many having come as for noon is hot To-day there was a severe frost, but it was warm at noon. irek'ei ch'acha okinan * tteut patktui in o thus \nsit coming thought outside work is YoHir calling in this way is more than I could expect. 1^ H^4 ^'^l ^^ -^^ 4 ^^^- ye-pora tampai pout eh* ye oko ch'a taryera look here tobacco join come and tea infuse Here ! light his pipe and bring tea. ^^i;^^) ^t t 4H i *i 4 chyoucb3'enchaei + chyoheun syoul poue teiyera kettle good wine pour beat Put good wine in the kettle and heat it. i syoureun * taran syoul koa talla tokchiant'a this wine oiher wine with differ poisonous not is This wine is different ; it is not strong. 13. 15. 16. * Oppositive case. t Locative case. 53 230 COEEAN MANUAL. Exercise 35, 5. 0. y]^ ^^^ y}t "^^ "J-sa t s. -r kere kamyen tari apheuko pal to poureutt'e on foot if go leg sore and foot also blistered By going on foot your legs will be sore and your feet blistered. ^4-e: ^i-l -^lA-^ t<>| cheykeun small sineul shoes smeumyen if shoe pan feet If you wear small shoes your feet will be sore. chointa squee>ze ^] ^} I ^1 ^^^] J5l *] :^^j=-f^ 1 this sarami salchiko momi man flesh carry and body This man is stout and stronef. kenchyanghata strong 4. JX keu that A 6. saraiaeun man ^e| p'arihako raomi lean makes and body That man is lean and w^eak. 6| ^^ ^ 4 ^^1 JL-Si H-:a ^t -?a -r yakhata weak makes 4 'f^ momei ohan nako penyelhako tou t'ong nako in body chill come out and feverish and head sore comes out and I am feeling chilly and feverish, and I have a headache. kak t'ong nako on momi apheuni ama hakchil inka pota foot sore comes out and whole body is sore possibly ague is probable I see My feet are sore and I ache all over ; I think it is an attack of ague. 1 aneui elkoreul this child face Look at that child's face : aheui J.V| <^^| ^^6| -ft^t^ poni yekchil chyoungi hayetta look small-pox heavy has made it has suffered severely from small-pox. 8 oV^n-^to^in^^lTli;?!^^!^^^ aheuika oumourei ppachye choukcul keeal kenchye naiyetta child ,in well having fallen about to die thing saved extricated A child fell into the well ; it was pulled out and saved. EXERCISES, 231 EXERCISE 35 {continued). tXs- 'I- amo whatever ^1 ket thing to also *]4t isyanghaii strange There is nothing strange whatever. kcsi thing ^>t epso not is 10.-* ) ^^1 ^7l 5:4 4^1- ^^ 3.0}^ sai sorai teutki chyot'a naka teure poara bird sound hearing is good out go hear see The birds are singing prettily ; go and listen to them. 13. nameui mal teureni orei sichyeri chal tointa another's speech heard this year crops good become I hear there will be good crops this year. i saiei chip keuipyel myet pen teuresso this period home news several times I have heard Dmring this period I have heard several times from home. monchye tareun tou pen teutko i tareun p'yenchi aui poasso former month two times hear and this month letter not I saw Last month I heard twice, but this month I received no letters. chikeum now mousam mal teurennanya keuipyel what speech have hcaid news What news have you now heard '? Any news mnanya is 15. 16. amo mal to mot teuresso pyei mal epso whatever speech also not have heard particular speech not is I have heard nothing whatever ; there is nothing special. kcu syosik that news chasyeihi teuresso clearly have heard That news I heard distinctly kechat man false speech it is not true. o is 232 COREAN MANUAL. ExEiiciSE 36. 1. v^l 6\^}^^ ^ ^M^H nai apanim py^ng teuressini my father sickness has entered My father is sick ; 4. D. 'XT y} ^^l 4^^ J^vief elleun ka euionen ch'j^enghaye onera quickly go doctor having invited come Go quickly and call the doctor. euiouen moisye oasso keuremyen teure osiraira doc-tor served has come if so entered come say I have brought the doctor ; tell him to come in, then. euioueu maik poko bye patak to poasso doctor pulse see and tongue surface also saw The doctor felt his pulse and examined his tongue. S] ^i t ^ ^l.^^ ^/^ t"^ -t3L euiouen mal pyeng syeika taitan hata hako doctor speech sickness condition severely makes says The doctor states that his illness is quite serious. yak pangmoun sse chyoumyensye hanan mari medicine recipe wiitten while giving saying speech When giving the prescription, he said: fang yak to sseuko hoan yak to mekeusio boil medicine also use and pill medicine also eat please Please take the medicine, part in draught and part in pills. karo yakeun chal ttai tdon mourei t'asye masio flour medicine sleep time hot in water mixed drink ^ut this powder in water and take it at bedtime. EXERCISES. 233 EXEBCISES 36 (contmed). ^ ^■f7lS ^^^) pyeng cbyoung-hakinan * ch-young-hatai sickness heavy making beavy though make Although his sickness is serious, ^-^ 1 ^) "d '^^^ }i^^ yak han chyei man mekeumyen natkeitta medicine one dose only if eat will recover He will recover if he only takes one dose of medicine. ^'- H} ^52: ^i J.t ^<^] ^)^ idi pap meknan ket t'ohan touiei ch'yeicheung nasso rice eating thing vomited after constipation recovered After vomiting his food, his constipation was relieved. 10.. 12. 18. 14 onareun echei pota chom nan-teut-heio as for to-day yesterday compared little recovered likely makes To-day he appears somewhat 'better than he was yesterday. ^ *;» p'yeikyeng koa kankyengeit pyengi ta teulko lung and liver sickness all enter and His lung and his livei: were afifected, and. ^ 4-fl^) ^^ 4*1^ '^^''l ^l^f mok koa moureuphi tto ta pouesye taitari^ apha neck and knee also all swollen severely sore He suffered severely from a swollen neck and knee. 1=1: la ^1 Hj'd ^t«1*H yakeul mekko ttameul naimyen naheul-t'e-i-ni t medicine eat and sweat if produce recovering position If you take medicine and begin to perspire, while recovering 4-1 ^^] 7l-^-fa 4^ ^^1 ^'fsf momeul tepkei kansyouhako param ssoichi mara body hotly preserve and wind to shoot avoid Keep yourself wa^rm and avoid catching cold. * Oppositive case. t Locative case. I T*e-i-m, from Ve (condition) ^ i (nominative), and ni (which has the forCe of* semicolon). 59 — - 16. 2S4 COBEAN MANUAL. Exercise 37. ^ ir«) ^^ ^^ ^^d^ ^]%^ gyonrei ouheui yere choiineul fliresso cart above many priBoners loaded There are many prisoners sitting on the cart. keu chyoungei ban nomeul soi saseullo kyelpak hayeaaa that among one person iron with chain bound have made One of them was bound with an iron cham. » "^t ^"1-^ ^^5. ^]%^ taran choiineun noheuro maiyesao other prisoners v^ith rope tied The other prisoners were bound with ropes. 5L1 la — ^ ^^4 4±^ ^^ kceul saramteuri ♦ tochekeul chapeura kasso district men robbers to capture went The people in the district went out to apprehend the robbers. tooheki tomanghaye chapchi mot hayoaao robbers having ran away to capture not make (Butyihe robbers ran away and they did not catoh them. 6, 6^^| ^}6\] t^ ^ -±^ I ^X 4 ^] 3. 4^ echsi pamei yere kounsa mal t'ako ch'ong meiko oasye yesterday at night several soldi sra hurse ride and gun carry and came Yesterday evening a number cf eoidiars came on horseback, armed with guns ; 7. jx„^, ^4 -I t} 4<'} ^} 7} -%'«H| y}5i *|-f ^ di kou tochekeul ta chapataka okei katna toueiso those robbers all captured prison impriFon placed They captured ail the robbers and imprisoned them. « -I^Jr't 4 4 ^^4 ^1 l'^^ ^^l-^^-- pourantang koa chom tochek nomeui hamkkeui cbapa kaaso burglars and little rolbers person altogether c»vptured went Ihc.y captured all the burglars and thievea. ♦ i>iural. :SX£E018Eg. iS^ 10. 11. 12. EXEBCISES 37 (conHnued). 4^*1 ^^t ^^] ^*| ^^ -3d. koanoueni mounchoihan houei polki manhi ch'yesgo officials having investigated after thighs many flogged The authorities held ah investigation and flogged them severely. koisyou nomeun m&i matko mok paihye choukiko chief person whip meet and neck cut and kill The chief criminal was flogged and beheaded ; ^ ^-8: nt ^3, ^ ^H ^*K tou nomeun hyengpel patko mok maiye choukita two persons punishment receive and neck tied kill The other two were tortured and strangled. keu namanan k'al sseuioue okei katoasso those remaming knife wear in gaol imprisoned The remainder were made to wear the cangue and put in prison. amo Bongsa-rato ton man issamyen ikeuiko whatever lawsuit be money only if be gain but If you are rich you will win your lawsuit, but 14. 7} vf -f jn. -^M] 6j ^ -^ ;^| 7] ^ cf kananhako hyengsyei epgamyen chiki souipta poor and influence if not have losing easy If you are poor and have no influence you will easily lose. kananhan sarameun hangsyang chiko poor as for man always loses but The poor man always loses, but pouchya sarameun haiigsyaug ikeuichio yei keure hao rich as for man always win yea thus make The rich man always wine. Yea, that is bo. 13. 236- COREAN MANUAL. Exercise 38. i nyangpaneun pyesal iiopko chye koanoueueuu kallyesso this gentleman rank is high and that official changed This man is of high rank; that officer was removed. chyench\'angeisye* kongeul Hyeiouko k'eun pyesal haycsso battle-field merit established and great rank made He obtained distinction in the field and rose to high rank. keu chyangsyounan komisa chal kenarichi mot hao that general soldier well to lead not made That general could not lead his troops properly. 4. -4 J; cf ^f «^ t^ S| 7f| ^n] 4] -f ^ 4i ssahotaka chyek-pyeng-enikei k'eukei p'aihayesso fought enemy soldier by largely defeated They were severely defeated in battle by the enemy. 5. t^ 4 *i *l 4 -I '^l ^1 i- «i 4^-1 1 ^ tf ehye koanoueni ssahomei p'aihaye p'achikhayetta that official in battle being defeated degrade from office That officer having been defeated in battle was degraded. nalli namyen on narahi kekchyeng toio war if arise entire nation anxiety becomes If war breaks out the whole State is disturbed. narahi t'aip'yenghamyen paiksyeng p'yetianhao kingdom if peaceful people happy If there is peace the people are happy. 8 5^;^ 6) ^ :^ ^H ^ *i^ B^i^"^ tocheki mot kyentaiye heyechye tomanghata thieves not enduring scattered fled The rebels fled, defeated, in every direction. * Ablative case. EXEECISES. 237 10. EXERCISE 38 {continued). tomanghanan tohekeul melli cbchocli'ara flying thieves far off drive off Drive the retreating robbers far av/ay. kounsa ssahonan ttai taichyang koa pichyang aireul manhi ssesso soldiers fighting time general and officers suffering many used During war the general and the officers suifer severely. 11. ^ >^ 6| jc ^ JL 7^ -§ ^ «j- ^ ^^ ^-j ^ ^ chyekpyengi teureoketeun pyenpangeul chal chikheuio enemy troops when enter frontier well guard When the enemy's troops approach, carefully defend your frontiers. 12 t^ v^ 6] c, 5^ JL 7] ^ ^1 ^ ^ ^Hp] -f 6^ ef chyekpyengi teureoki chyenei tantani yeipihayera enemy troops entry before strongly prepare Prepare well before the approach of the enemy's troops. 13 tA\ si\ oy H i- '^ t) ^.4 ^ j£ *M ^1 5 t '^ yeipi-ani-hamyen paik pen ssahoa to ikeuichi mot hanta prepare not if make hundred times fight though to conquer not make If no preparations are made, defeat will follow, however often you fight 14. 6|.o^ t^^ ^ *hH 5) /i 44 :£ *J -t eHJ: ama yere nal ani toiye sinkoan toimhakeisso probable several days not becoming new officer will take up duty Probably before many days are over a new magistrate will arrive. sinkoaneul chal mannamyen paiksyengi sal-tteut-ha o new official well if meet people live probably make If the new official is good, the people will have a chance of existing ; t'amhanan koanouen mannamyen paiksyengi tot'anei teunta avaricious official if meet people oppression enter (But) if the official is avaricious, they will be oppresbed. 16 00 COEEAN MANUAL. 6. 8. Exercise 39. tto orita yei tto, popsyeita also will eome yes also let us see I will come again. Yes, good-bye. nai kattaka elp'it tora orita I having gone quickly back will come I will come back directly I get there. s- %] % ^}^^y} *H -2.e ^f-S^ nai-il kariitka ani onal kao to-morrow will go no to-day go Shall I go to-morrow? Na, go to-day. * 1 °}^ t ^ i ^^ y}-^ tal mata ban pen sik oatta kao moon each one time each came go I come and go once every month. ban pen kaorita yei encheitenchi osio one time will go yes whenever come I will call once Yes^ come when you like. 7^ S ?£ ^jL ojL 7l ^ 5£ -fjt, kal tteut tto hako an kal tteut tto hao go intention also make and not go intentioa also make I don't know whether to go or not. kaketeun erousineikeui* mounan-ina hao if go father respects some make If y-ou go, give my respects to your father. ^2^ V^?^ ^^7} ^^^^ orarak narirak hataka tterechyetta aseend descend making fell down It fell when floating up and down. *Dative case. EXERCISES, 239^ 10-. 11 i:XEECWE 39 (fioiitinued),, ^ S.A ^ t t "^ ^ pai teure oattan mar epso ship entered came speech not is There is no news, of the ship's arrival. i kesan nai haran ket koa taUa this thing I said thing wi^h^ ^igerent; This, is different |rom what I prd^yed, nenan nai sikin kesal ta haj^ennanya as for you I ordered thing all hfiye m^de Have yqu done all that I ox'dered you to (^o? ne onei chosimeul chom te 9-ni hayennany?*, you why care little more not haye madg ^Vhy hg-ve you not been a little moy§ careful? ne oh'inhi ka poaya chyok'einnanya, you personally go having seen will he gopd' Had you not better go yourself ^nd see*^ chikeumeun kyeral eptako *■ nairil omako* hatera as for now leisure pot h to-morrow will corfte s?iy§ He says he has uq time now. but will, come to-morrow-. 14. 15. naral ch'yenghayessitai pol iri issesye mot kassq xnQ invited though seeing work being npt goiie I wa^s inyited, but h^-d bu^in§ss and cpuld not go. kakinan kakeissitai onareun iri isse niot ]^^.o as for going though will gQ fis for to.day work being not ^Q I'll go some time, but I am busy tQ=dfty P-nd can't so, *Ko indicates closo of quot.i.tiQriv 240 COKEAN MANUAL. Exercise 40. pouekei k'eun sot koa chyekeun ket touri issani in kitchen large pot and small thing two are There are two pots in the kitchen, one large and one small. ^^ ^^^ ^1-^ ^1 1 ^ 3. ^ ^ "1] ^ ^ it 4 e{- pang cli'ipta akoungei poul ttaiko hoatekei syekt'an nohara room cold in flue fire burn and in stove coal put The room is cold ; light the kang and put coal in the stove. ^J: 3f ^ 7|- ?|- Pf 5| «r 7lS.i>}^.:^ 7|.^a| 6}^ k'al koa syoukarak ta innanka poara chyekarak man isso knife and spoon all are whether see .fork only is See if all the knives and spoons are there. There are only forks. ch'akoan koa ch'atchyong koa syoulchan maiihi itko teapot and teacup and wineglass many are but There are many teapots, teacups, and wineglasses ; but 5. sapal koa taichyepeun * epsani sa oaya hakeitta bowl and plates not are buy having come will make There are no bowels or plates. Better buy some, then. « 4 *! 4 ^ i ^1;^^ i ^ *| ^ 4 ^ 2| 4 hain pjuUe poul p'ouiko moul kkeuriko ch'a tarira servant call fire burn and water boil and tea infuse Call my servant to light the fire, boil some water, and make tea. chari chopaneun kachye oko chyemsimeun neutkei chiera mat breakfast bring come and as for tiffin late make Bring my early breakfast, but make my tiffin later. 84i -^-^^ *|jl>3>a 4^-17) i" ^Ji.^^^■ chyenyelceun kouk kkeuriko saingsyen koa sokoki koue onera as for evening soup boil and fish and ox flesh roast come For dinner make some soup and roast some fish and beef. * Oppositive case. EXEECISES. 241 EXERCISE 40 {continued). ^ ^ t ^-i eH^^l H 4i ^-^^1*1 i ^] t *i rJf osnnim hana okeissini eumsik ch'yaksiri yeipihayera guest one will come food carefully prepare I have a guest coming, so prepare a good dinner. 10. etten nyangpani pokyo t'ako oasye tai-in poiopcha hao some gentleman chair ride and came great man let us see says A gentleman has cjms in a chair and wants to see you, sir. nai tangsineul echei peu'te elmareul* kitarinchi moro I sir yesterday from how much to wait not know Since yesterday I have been looking for you ever so much. 12. ^ ^ ^1 «} ?£ ^ t "i^^^ts.^^^ ^^ oatkeitchi manan keuphan illo taikouel teurekatta oasso was coming yet urgent work palace entered came 1 was coming, but went to the Palace on urgent business. olchonl alko pyenpyench'i-mot-han eumsikeul 3-eipihayesso coming know and good not make food prepared I knew you were coming, and prepared a smaU repast. taichyepeul irek'ei koahi hasini maamei pouranhao welcome thus excessive make in mind uneasy You have been so hospitable, I do not know how to thank you. taikam encheitenchi kyeral issamyen nai ch'acha kaorita 6 vcellency whenever leisure if be I seek will go I will call on Your Excellency whenever you have leisure. 16 -| 4^1 ^%^] ^>^ ^ f>\^t^ 5f S. -^>^| -^ hangsyang pyello iri epsani amo ttai-rato osio always particularly work not is any time though come please I navev hive anything special to do ; come at anj' time, please. * Accusative case. 61f i RETURN EAST ASIATIC LIBRARY TO— ^ 208 Durant Hall 642-2556 LOAN PERIOD 1 . 1 MONTH 2 3 4 5 6 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS DUE AS STAMPED BELOW nrn 1 9 iqR4 RECD DEC 1 Oiqft4 EAL RECD imz 1 19883 . FAt. ^UG i 9 1988 '^^m FORM NO. DD9, 38m UNIVERSITY OF C/ , 477 BERKELEY ^LIFORNIA, BERKELEY ^CA 94720 ®s j n ft h-tm n:U^:ft Si'i;;